You are on page 1of 622

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio)

Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)


STUDENT GUIDE
TWT42013 Edition 1.1

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT @@YEAR. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel-Lucent
Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.

Terms of use and legal notices


Switch to notes view!

TERMS OF USE AND LEGAL NOTICE


Alcatel-Lucent provides this training course to you subject to these Terms of Use and Legal Notice. Your use of this training
course and/or this site constitutes your acceptance of and agreement to these Terms of Use and Legal Notice. These Terms of
Use and Legal Notice, as well as the contents of this training course, may be updated or amended by Alcatel-Lucent from time to
time without prior notice to you. Your use of the Alcatel-Lucent training materials after such update or amendment constitutes
your acceptance of and agreement to said updated or amended Terms of Use and Legal Notice.
SAFETY WARNING
Alcatel-Lucent training materials can be for products or refer to products that have both lethal and dangerous voltages
present. Always observe all safety precautions and do not work on the equipment alone. The user is strongly advised not to
wear conductive jewelry while working on the products. Equipment referred to or used during this course may be electrostatic
sensitive. Please observe correct anti-static precautions.
PERMISSION TO USE CONTENT
The information, communications, scripts, photos, text, video, graphics, music, sounds, images and other materials provided in
this training course (collectively the "Content"), is intended for the lawful use of employees of Alcatel-Lucent and other authorized
participants in this Alcatel-Lucent training course. You are hereby granted a non-exclusive, non-transferable permission to access
and use the Content solely for your personal training and non-commercial use. This permission may be terminated by AlcatelLucent at any time for any reason or no reason, with or without notice. You must immediately cease use of the Content upon
such termination.
COPYRIGHTS AND TRADEMARKS
The unauthorized copying, displaying or other use of any Content from this training course is a violation of the law and AlcatelLucents corporate policies. The Content is protected in France, the U.S. and other countries by a variety of laws, including but
not limited to, copyright laws and treaty provisions, trademark laws, patent laws and other proprietary rights laws (collectively,
"IP Rights"). In addition to Alcatel-Lucents IP Rights in the Content, in part and in whole, Alcatel-Lucent, and any of the third
parties who have licensed and/or contributed to the Content, owns a copyright in the formatting and presentation of the Content.
2
COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
Alcatel-Lucent
does
not grant you any permission to use the Content other than the permission expressly stated in these Terms of
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet
Radio)
Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)
Use and Legal Notice. All other use of Content from this training course, including, but not limited to, modification, publication,
transmission, participation in the transfer or sale of, copying, reproduction, republishing, creation of derivative works from,
distribution, performance, display, incorporation into another training course or presentation, or in any other way exploiting any
of the Content, in whole or in part, for uses other than those expressly permitted herein is strictly prohibited and shall not be
made without Alcatel-Lucents prior written consent. All characters appearing in this training course are fictitious. Any
resemblance to real persons, living or dead, is purely coincidental.
There may be a number of proprietary logos, marks, trademarks, slogans and product designations found in the Content. Alcatel,
Lucent, Alcatel-Lucent and the Alcatel-Lucent logos are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent. All other trademarks are the property of
their respective owners. Alcatel-Lucent does not grant you a license to use any of the foregoing logos, marks, trademarks,
slogans and product designations in any fashion. Granting of the right to access and use the Content for training purposes does
not confer upon you any license under any of Alcatel-Lucents or any third party's IP Rights.
DISCLAIMER
ALCATEL-LUCENT DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES REGARDING THE TRAINING COURSES OR THE CONTENT, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. THE ALCATEL-LUCENT WILL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE OR LIABLE FOR ANY INJURY, LOSS, CLAIM, DAMAGE, OR ANY
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, PUNITIVE, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND (INCLUDING WITHOUT
LIMITATION LOSS PROFITS OR LOSS SAVINGS), WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHERWISE,
THAT ARISES OUT OF OR IS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH (A) ANY USE OR MISUSE OF THE CONTENT OR THE TRAINING
COURSES BY YOU, OR (B) ANY FAILURE OR DELAY BY ALCATEL-LUCENT, ITS OFFICERS, DIRECTORS, AGENTS OR EMPLOYEES
IN CONNECTION WITH THE CONTENT OR THE TRAINING COURSES (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE USE OF OR
INABILITY TO USE ANY COMPONENT OF THE CONTENT OR TRAINING BY YOU). SOME JURISDICTIONS LIMIT OR PROHIBIT
SUCH EXCLUSION OF WARRANTIES OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITIES AND SO THE FOREGOING EXCLUSION OF WARRANTIES OR
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
GOVERNING LAW
These Terms of Use and Legal Notice are governed by the laws of France. The operation and use of the training course is
governed by the laws of the country that governs your employment contract, if applicable. If any provision of these Terms of Use
and Legal Notice, or the application thereto to a person or circumstance, is held invalid or unenforceable by law, statute or a
court of competent jurisdiction, for any reason, then such provision shall be modified and/or superseded by a provision that
reflects the intent of the original provision as closely as possible. All other provisions of these Terms of Use and Legal Notice
shall remain in full force and effect. You may not assign these Terms of Use or any permission granted hereunder without
Alcatel-Lucents prior written consent. Nothing herein shall be deemed an employment agreement or an offer of employment or
an alteration in any way of a users terms of employment with or within Alcatel-Lucent.
Copyright 2011 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.

Course outline
4. Topic/Section is Positioned Here

1. ANSI
Module 1. TWT42013-1 Course Overview

Welcome to 9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio)

2. Product
Module 1. TWT42013-2 Overview

5. Topic/Section is Positioned Here

Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

3. Product Architecture
Module 1. TWT42013-3 MSS Hardware
Module 2. TWT42013-4 MPT Hardware
Module 3. TWT42013-5 Outdoor Hardware

6. Topic/Section is Positioned Here

Section 1. Course Overview

4. NE Operation
1. TWT42013-6
Operator
GUI Interface
zModule
Module
1. Course
Overview
Module 2. TWT42013-7 Cross-Connection
Section
Product Performance Monitoring
Module 2.
3. TWT42013-8
Module 4. TWT42013-9 Alarm Monitor
zModule
Module
1. Product
Overview
5. TWT42013-10
Remove
Cross Connections
Module 6. TWT42013-11 Browser Interface

7. Topic/Section is Positioned Here

Section 3. Product Architecture

5. Course
zModule
Module
1. MSS
1. TWT42013-12 Summary

Module 2. MPT-HL

6. Terms
1. TWT42013-13
Acronyms
zModule
Module
3. Outdoor
Units
7.
Exercises4. Operation
Section
Module 1. TWT42013-14 Labs

Module 1. GUI

Module 2. Cross-Connections

Module 3. Diagnosis and Performance Monitoring

Module 4. Alarm Monitor/RSL History

Module 5. Remove Cross-Connections

Module 6. Browser

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio)


Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

Section 5. Course
z

Module 1. Summary

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.

Course objectives

Upon completion of this course, you should be able to:

Welcome to 9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio)


Describe equipment features, main applications, physical layout, external connections and the

Operations
& Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)
activation procedure

Use the Craft Terminal and documentation for local configuration


Monitor performance
List probable cause of an alarm

Upon completion of this course, you should be able to:


z Describe equipment features, main applications, physical layout, external connections and the

activation procedure
z Use the Craft Terminal and documentation for local configuration
z Monitor performance
z List probable cause of an alarm

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio)


Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

Your feedback is appreciated!


Please feel free to Email your comments to:
training.feedback@alcatel-lucent.com
Please include the following training reference in your email:
TWT42013 Edition 1.1
Thank you!

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.

Do not delete this graphic elements in here:

Section 1
ANSI
Module 1
Course Overview
TWT42013-1 Edition 3.03

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio)


Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)
TWT42013 Edition 1.1

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent @@YEAR

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-1 Edition 3.03
Section 1 Module 1 Page 1

Blank page

112
ANSI Course Overview
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

Document History

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

This page is left blank intentionally

Edition

Date

Author

Remarks

01.10

2008-09-30

Fisher, Sheldon

Added to ANSI version for NAR

01.21

2009-01-23

Fisher, Sheldon

Revised for R1.1 from R1.0

01.31

2009-03-05

Fisher, Sheldon

Final Revision

01.40

2009-06-15

Robinson, Ken

Revised to release 2.0

01.41

2009-07-20

Robinson, Ken

Revised after review

2.01

2010-07-30

Moehlenkamp, John

Revised to release 2.01

2.02

2010-11-30

Moehlenkamp, John

Revised to release 2.02

3.0

2011-02-28

Moehlenkamp, John

Revised to release 3.0

3.01

2011-06-29

Moehlenkamp, John

Revised to release 3.01

3.02

2011-11-15

Moehlenkamp, John

Updated format and revised to release 3.02

3.03

2012-02-07

Moehlenkamp, John

Revised to release 3.03

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-1 Edition 3.03
Section 1 Module 1 Page 2

Course objectives
Upon completion of this course, you should be able to:

Describe the basic concepts of the 9500 MPR-A


Turn-up and provision the system
Respond to and manage alarm conditions
Monitor system and application status
Maintain 9500 MPR-A hardware and software

113
ANSI Course Overview
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-1 Edition 3.03
Section 1 Module 1 Page 3

Course objectives [cont.]

114
ANSI Course Overview
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

This page is left blank intentionally

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-1 Edition 3.03
Section 1 Module 1 Page 4

References
The following documents support the 9500 MPR-A R3.02:

9500
9500
9500
9500
9500
9500
9500
9500
9500

MPR Product Information


MPR Installation Practices
MPR Operation and Administration
MPR Turn-Up
MPR Maintenance and Trouble Clearing
MPR Engineering Support Documentation
MPR-A MPT-GC User Manual
MPR-A MPR-e User Manual
MPR-A MSS-1c User Manual

Product documentation is available on CD-ROM and online:

3EM23952AHAA
3EM23953AHAA
3EM23954AHAA
3EM23955AHAA
3EM23956AHAA
3EM23957AHAA
3EM24569ADAA
3EM24570ADAA
3EM24571ADAA

CD-ROM
Electronic Documentation
3EM23951AHAA
Online through Alcatel-Lucents OnLine Customer Support (OLCS) web site at:
https://support.alcatel-lucent.com/portal/olcsHome.do
Product documentation updates appear on Alcatel-Lucents OLCS web site
before they are available in any other format.

115
ANSI Course Overview
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-1 Edition 3.03
Section 1 Module 1 Page 5

References [cont.]
Product Information 3EM23952AHAA:

Introduction
System Administration
Features
Equipment Layout
Unit Descriptions
Functional Operation
Engineering Specifications

Installation Practices 3EM23953AHAA


Operation and Administration 3EM23954AHAA:

Provisioning and Deprovisioning


Equipment Functions
Log In to and Out of System
Administer User Profiles
Cross Connections . . .
View Alarms and Abnormal Condition list . . . . . .
View Current Configuration Data

116
ANSI Course Overview
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-1 Edition 3.03
Section 1 Module 1 Page 6

References [cont.]
Turn-Up 3EM23955AHAA:

Overview
Safety Awareness
Electrostatic Sensitive Devices
Product Support Information

Maintenance and Trouble Clearing 3EM23956AHAA:


Alarm and Abnormal Condition Clearing Procedures
Equipment Replacement Procedures
Facility Alarms

Engineering Support Documentation 3EM23957AHAA

117
ANSI Course Overview
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-1 Edition 3.03
Section 1 Module 1 Page 7

References [cont.]
MPT-GC (80 GHz Wireless Links) User Manual 3EM24569ADCC:

Safety, EMC, EMF, ESD Norms and Equipment Labeling


Product Information and Planning
NE Management by Software Application
Installation
Provisioning
Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing
Line-UP and Commissioning

MPR-e (Outdoor units: MPT-HC V2 stand-alone) 3EM24570ADAA:

Safety, EMC, EMF, ESD Norms and Equipment Labeling


Product Information and Planning
NE Management by Software Application
Installation
Provisioning
Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing
Line-UP and Commissioning

118
ANSI Course Overview
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-1 Edition 3.03
Section 1 Module 1 Page 8

References [cont.]
Indoor: MSS-1c + Outdoor: MPT-HC V2 3EM24571ADAA:

Safety, EMC, EMF, ESD Norms and Equipment Labeling


Product Information and Planning
NE Management by Software Application
Installation
Provisioning
Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing
Line-UP and Commissioning

119
ANSI Course Overview
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-1 Edition 3.03
Section 1 Module 1 Page 9

End of module
Course Overview

1 1 10
ANSI Course Overview
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-1 Edition 3.03
Section 1 Module 1 Page 10

Do not delete this graphic elements in here:

Section 2
Product
Module 1
Overview

TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio)


Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)
TWT42013 Edition 1.1

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent @@YEAR

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03
Section 2 Module 1 Page 1

Blank page

212
Product Overview
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Document History
Edition

Date

This page is left blank intentionally


Author
Remarks

01.10

2008-09-30

Fisher, Sheldon

Added to ANSI version for NAR

01.21

2009-01-23

Fisher, Sheldon

Revised for R1.1 from R1.0

01.31

2009-03-05

Fisher, Sheldon

Final Revision

01.40

2009-06-15

Robinson, Ken

Revised to release 2.0

01.41

2009-07-20

Robinson, Ken

Revised after review

2.01

2010-07-30

Moehlenkamp, John

Revised to release 2.01

2.02

2010-11-30

Moehlenkamp, John

Revised to release 2.02

3.0

2011-02-28

Moehlenkamp, John

Revised to release 3.0

3.01

2011-06-29

Moehlenkamp, John

Revised to release 3.01

3.02

2011-11-15

Moehlenkamp, John

Updated format and revised to release 3.02

3.03

2012-02-07

Moehlenkamp, John

Revised to release 3.03

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03
Section 2 Module 1 Page 2

Module objectives
Upon completion of this module, you should be able to:

Describe
Describe
Describe
Describe

the basic concepts of the 9500 MPR-A radio


the features and advantages of the 9500 MPR-A radio
the 9500 MPR-A radio hardware
data path from the Access to the transceivers

213
Product Overview
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03
Section 2 Module 1 Page 3

Module objectives [cont.]

214
Product Overview
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

This page is left blank intentionally

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03
Section 2 Module 1 Page 4

Table of Contents
Switch to notes view!
1 Introduction to the 9500 MPR-A Radio
1.1 Classification of the New Generation Products
1.2 9500 MPR Introduction
1.3 MPR Family
1.4 MPR Family Hardware
1.5 Product Advantages - Multiservice Aggregation Layer
1.6 Product Advantages - Service Awareness
1.7 Product Advantages - Packet Node
1.8 Product Advantages - Service-driven Adaptive Modulation
1.9 Radio Link Aggregation
1.10 Cross-Polarized Interference Cancellation (XPIC)
1.11 Quality of Service
1.12 9500 MPR Network Management Solution
1.13 9500 MPR All Indoor Mount Arrangement
1.14 9500 MPR Split Mount Arrangement
1.15 9500 MPR Components
1.16 Control and Switching Module (CSM-E/Core-E)
1.17 Ethernet Access Switch (EAS/P8ETH)
1.18 MPT-HL
1.19 MPT-HL RF Connection (RF Filter)
1.20 TDM/PDH Access Modules
1.21 Access Modules
2 11.22
5
Radio Interface Modules
Product Overview
9500 1.23
MPR (Microwave
Packet
Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)
MSS
Architecture
1.24 Product Overview
COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03

Page
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32

Table of Contents [cont.]


Switch to notes view!

216
Product Overview
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

This page is left blank intentionally

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03

1 Introduction to the 9500 MPR-A Radio

217
Product Overview
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03
Section 2 Module 1 Page 7

1 Introduction to the 9500 MPR-A Radio

1.1 Classification of the New Generation Products

Alcatel-Lucent microwave product acronyms are now derived as follows:

9500 MPR-A
A = ANSI
Means radio
product

R = Radio
P = Packet

5 for Radio Cross-Connect

M = Microwave
Product Family
218
Product Overview
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03
Section 2 Module 1 Page 8

1 Introduction to the 9500 MPR-A Radio

1.2 9500 MPR Introduction


The 9500 MPR:
provides smooth transition of backhaul networks from TDM to IP
efficiently transports multimedia traffic since it handles packets natively, while still
supporting legacy TDM DS1/DS3 traffic
covers the frequency range from 6-38 GHz
y 6-38 GHz using the MOD300 Radio Interface (MOD300) card and Outdoor Unit 300 (ODU300)
y 5.8-11 GHz using the Ethernet Access Switch (EAS/P8ETH) and Microwave Packet TransportLong Haul (MPT-HL) transceiver
y Using the Microwave Packet Transport Access (MPTACC) and Microwave Packet Transport-High
Capacity (MPT-HC)

covers the 80 GHz frequency range using the MPT-GC (71-76 and 81-86 GHz)
supports up to 16 RF links for operation on the same or different frequency bands:
y
y
y
y

up
up
up
up
up

to
to
to
to
to

6 using the MOD300 and ODU300


12 using the EAS/P8ETH and MPT-HL Transceiver
12 using the MPTACC and MPT-HC. Each MPTACC supports up to 2 MPT-HCs.
16 using a combination of up to 6 MOD300/ODU300s, up to 12 MPT-HL Transceivers, and
12 MPTACC/MPT-HCs.

provides up to 16 Gb/s packet switching which creates flexible aggregate capacity


sharing across DS1, DS3 and Ethernet traffic
300 Mbps full-duplex Ethernet transport capacity
219
Product Overview
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03
Section 2 Module 1 Page 9

1 Introduction to the 9500 MPR-A Radio

1.3 MPR Family

2 1 10
Product Overview
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03
Section 2 Module 1 Page 10

1 Introduction to the 9500 MPR-A Radio

1.4 MPR Family Hardware

2 1 11
Product Overview
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03
Section 2 Module 1 Page 11

1 Introduction to the 9500 MPR-A Radio

1.5 Product Advantages - Multiservice Aggregation Layer

2 1 12
Product Overview
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Multiservice aggregation layer


The capacity to use Ethernet as a common transmission layer to transport any kind of traffic,
independently by the type of interface. Ethernet becomes the convergence layer.
9500 MPR-A aggregates and carries over a COMMON PACKET LAYER: TDM 2G, 3G and IP/Ethernet. This

allows sharing of common packet transmission infrastructures, regardless of the nature of carried traffic.

Due to the nature of Ethernet, each service can be discriminated based on several parameters like

quality of service.

Mapping different access technologies over Ethernet is achieved by standardized protocols like circuit

emulation and pseudo-wire.

R99 - original standard for UMTS WCDMA based networks


HSDPA (High Speed Data Packet Access) - add on to R99/UMTS networks which adds a shared high speed
downlink packet channel
ISAM (Indexed Sequential Access Method) - a method for indexing data for fast retrieval
WiMAX (Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access) - telecommunications protocol that provides
fixed and mobile Internet access

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03
Section 2 Module 1 Page 12

1 Introduction to the 9500 MPR-A Radio

1.6 Product Advantages - Service Awareness

2 1 13
Product Overview
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Service awareness
Traffic handling and quality management, queuing traffic according to the type of service assigned,
independently by the type of interface.
Service awareness means the ability to discriminate the different traffic types carried over the converged

Ethernet stream. The traffic flow can be composed by DS1, DS3, and/or IP/Eth, coming from different
sources, and therefore having different requirements.

For instance DS1 traffic from a 3G base stations can carry voice (high priority, real time service) and

data (lower priority and possibly non real time with high variability load, such as internet browsing,
music download or video streaming).

Service awareness is what allows identifying the traffic types, and in case of the non real time variable

bit rate one, optimize the band with overbooking of the radio scarce resource.

PWE3 - Pseudowire emulation edge to edge

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03
Section 2 Module 1 Page 13

1 Introduction to the 9500 MPR-A Radio

1.7 Product Advantages - Packet Node

2 1 14
Product Overview
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Packet node
The 9500 MPR offers a packet-based Microwave Service Switch (MSS) with a 10 Gigabit backplane to

interconnect short-haul and long-haul radio transceivers into a multidirectional, multi-reach packet node
that functions as a single network element.

The MSS can also provide Gigabit Ethernet (GigE) and metallic uplinks.
Packets can be transported over Ethernet or PDH in any direction, avoiding service aggregation

bottlenecks in terms of capacity, service types and interface types.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03
Section 2 Module 1 Page 14

1 Introduction to the 9500 MPR-A Radio

1.8 Product Advantages - Service-driven Adaptive Modulation

2 1 15
Product Overview
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Service-driven adaptive modulation


Fully exploit the air bandwidth in its entirety by changing modulation scheme according to the propagation
availability and allocate transport capacity, discriminating traffic by different services, only possible in a
packet based environment.
Traffic with high priority will always have bandwidth available, like voice (deterministic approach).
Broadband traffic is discriminated by Quality of Service (QoS) dynamically, with modulation scheme

changes driven by propagation conditions.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03
Section 2 Module 1 Page 15

1 Introduction to the 9500 MPR-A Radio

1.9 Radio Link Aggregation


Radio LAG is supported on the ODU300, MPT-HC, and MPT-HL, and groups
a set of ports so that two network nodes can be interconnected using
multiple links to increase link capacity and availability between them.
When aggregated, two or more physical links operate as a single logical
link. Traffic capacity is the sum of the individual link capacities.
This doubling, tripling or quadrupling of capacity is relevant where more
capacity is required than can be provided on one physical link.
Link aggregation also provides redundancy between aggregated links. If a
link fails, its traffic is redirected onto the remaining link, or links.
Radio link aggregation supports
the following services:
TDM2TDM
TDM2ETH
Ethernet services

ASAP

Alarm Severity Assignment Profile

2 1 16
Product Overview
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

ASAP

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Alarm Severity Assignment Profile

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03
Section 2 Module 1 Page 16

1 Introduction to the 9500 MPR-A Radio

1.9 Radio Link Aggregation [cont.]


Radio LAG size is restricted to the following:
up to three Radio LAG ports per NE
up to six MOD300/ODU300 ports per Radio LAG port
up to six MPT-HC ports per Radio LAG port
up to four MPT-HL ports per Radio LAG port
TMN inband should be cross-connected with only one radio interface of a
radio LAG port
To add a radio port to a Radio LAG port, the radio port must not be
provisioned as a member to any of the following:
cross-connection
VLAN
port segregation
PPP RF enabled on the radio channel

2 1 17
Product Overview
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03
Section 2 Module 1 Page 17

1 Introduction to the 9500 MPR-A Radio

1.10 Cross-Polarized Interference Cancellation (XPIC)


Cross-Polarized Interference Cancellation (XPIC) provides the ability to
operate two links on the same radio channel frequency, one using
vertical polarization and the other using horizontal polarization.
Supported on the MPT-HC only
XPIC typically provides 20 dB improvement in polarization discrimination.
The actual improvement depends on the native discrimination provided
by the antenna alignment and any reduction of this discrimination caused
by atmospheric effects (fading)
XPIC supports the following radio configurations:
Single 2x(1+0) XPIC
Double 2x(1+1) HSB co-channel XPIC
4x(1+0) XPIC
XPIC supports the following:
Frequency: L6, U6, 7, 8, 11, 15, 18, and 23 GHz
Modulation: 128 and 256 QAM
Radio channel spacing: 30, 40, and 50 MHz
2 1 18
Product Overview
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03
Section 2 Module 1 Page 18

1 Introduction to the 9500 MPR-A Radio

1.11 Quality of Service


The Quality of Service (QoS) feature assigns the priority for Ethernet
packets according to the selected QoS mode. See Figure 6-9 for an
overview of the QoS implementation
QoS provides eight internal queues to support different traffic priorities.
The QoS function assigns Ethernet packets to one of the eight egress
traffic queues
QoS classification determines the method the system uses to assign
packet priority
QoS classification criterion is assigned at the NE level and applied to all
radio and Ethernet ports
The system supports the following QoS classification modes:
Disabled
DiffServ
IEEE 802.1p

2 1 19
Product Overview
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03
Section 2 Module 1 Page 19

1 Introduction to the 9500 MPR-A Radio

1.12 9500 MPR Network Management Solution

Supervision of all Alcatel-Lucent


transport portfolio and third-party
SNMP elements
Interface for easy integration in umbrella
systems
TSM-8000 - Fault and element
manager for microwave
1340 INC - Element manager and
TDM circuit manager
5620 SAM - Element manager and
service manager
Web-based craft terminal - For field
engineers and small networks
One common user interface for any platform
2 1 20
Product Overview
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is a standard protocol for the management of
entities in an IP local area network.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03
Section 2 Module 1 Page 20

1 Introduction to the 9500 MPR-A Radio

1.13 9500 MPR All Indoor Mount Arrangement


MPT-HL

MSS-8

MSS-4

or MSS-1c
No physical knobs, dials, or controls

Up to 12 radio links per node


Unprotected: (1+0, 2+0),1+1 HSB, SD, and FD radio protection node
Frequencies: 5.8 Unlicensed, L6, U6, 10.5, and 11 GHz
Static and adaptive modulation
Bandwidths: 10 and 30 MHz
Modulations: 32, 128, and 256 QAM
2 1 21
Product Overview
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03
Section 2 Module 1 Page 21

1 Introduction to the 9500 MPR-A Radio

1.14 9500 MPR Split Mount Arrangement


MSS-8

ODU300/Antenna

or MSS-4

No physical knobs, dials, or controls

or
MPT-HC/Antenna
MPT-HC V2/Antenna

Up to 12 radio links per node


Unprotected, 1+1 HSB, SD, and FD (2+0) radio
protection mode
Frequencies: L6, U6, 7, 8, 11, 15, 18, 23, 28, and 38 GHz
Static and adaptive modulation
Bandwidths: 10, 30, 40, and 50 MHz
Modulations: 4, 16, 32, 64, 128, and 256 QAM
2 1 22
Product Overview
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03
Section 2 Module 1 Page 22

1 Introduction to the 9500 MPR-A Radio

1.15 9500 MPR Components


Main Equipment Components
Microwave Packet Transport, High Power, Long Haul - MPTMPT-HL
ODU300/Antenna

Microwave Service Switch - MSS


MSS4

or
MPT-HC/Antenna
MPT-HC V2/Antenna

Microwave Service Switch - MSS


MSS8

2 1 23
Product Overview
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03
Section 2 Module 1 Page 23

1 Introduction to the 9500 MPR-A Radio

1.16 Control and Switching Module (CSM-E/Core-E)


The Ethernet switch must assure complete interconnections between all
the boards connected in 9500 MSS node
Power
Supply
Unit

Flash

Controller

RAM

GigE

GigE

GigE

CSM-E/Core-E
GigE
EAS/P8ETH

EAS/P8ETH

DS1
MOD300

ETHERNET
SWITCH

GigE

GigE
GigE

LIU
CRU

Product Overview
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

Slot 8

Eth

2 1 24

Eth

Eth

Eth

Eth

Eth

4 Ethernet RJ45

DS3

2 Ethernet SFP

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Control and Switching Module


9500 MPR radio system family supports, in a common platform, PDH DS1, DS3, MOD300, and packet data
(Ethernet) applications. The 9500 MPR handles packets natively, which optimizes the use of new access
technologies, such as High-Speed Downlink Packet Access (HSDPA), Worldwide Interoperability for
Microwave Access (WiMAX) and Evolution-Data Optimized (EV-DO) and facilitates the transport of highbandwidth services.
Microwave Service Switch (MSS) implements functionalities of grooming, routing, switching and protection,
exploiting a packet oriented technology.
Two Small Form factor Pluggable (SFP) ready for 1000Base-LX/SX (single/multi-mode fiber) transceiver

port

Gigabit Ethernet serial interfaces

The CSM-E/Core-E card performs the following macro functions:


CSM Controller - Equipment Controller and Physical Machine Controller - to manage all the peripheral

modules

Layer 2 Ethernet Switch will perform Cross-Connect function between all the peripherals and Ethernet

ports.

Clock Reference Unit (CRU) generates the Network Element Clock, for example, a clock to all 9500 MSS

boards

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03
Section 2 Module 1 Page 24

1 Introduction to the 9500 MPR-A Radio

1.17 Ethernet Access Switch (EAS/P8ETH)


CSM-E/Core-E

PSU

Controller

Transport and radio


peripherals

Flash
RAM
MPT
SFP

GigE

ETHERNET
SWITCH

GigE

ETHERNET
SWITCH
EAS/P8ETH

LIU

Ethernet Access

Ethernet Access
2 1 25
Product Overview
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03
Section 2 Module 1 Page 25

1 Introduction to the 9500 MPR-A Radio

1.18 MPT-HL

Main Side

SFP port

Not used

Spare Side

Power
PA
0=Disable
1=Enable

2 1 26
Product Overview
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

The Microwave Packet Transport High Capacity, Long Haul (MPT-HL) is a radio transceiver for long haul
applications.
Frequency range: 5.8, 6, and 11 GHz

It features high transmitter output power and an all-indoor design.


The interface to the MPT-HL is a Gigabit Ethernet (GigE) connection (SFP), which when connected to the
MSS, supports both traditional TDM and IP microwave solutions.
Unprotected, 1+1 Hot Standby (HSB) with Space Diversity (SD) or Frequency Diversity (FD) Radio

Protection

Software (SW) license control


Configurations

Channel MHz

QAM

10

32

37

128

52

32

114

5.8, 10.5, 11

128

160

5.8, L6, 10.5, 11

256

183

5.8, L6, 10.5, 11

30

Cap. Mb/s

Frequency (GHz)
5.8
5.8, L6, U6,10.5, 11

When using the indoor transceiver (MPT-HL) shelf with RF filters in lieu of the ODU, the signal is carried to
and from the EAS/P8ETH (MSS shelf) by the small form-factor pluggable transceiver (SFP) cable
assembly to the MPT-HL Transceiver (MPT-HL shelf).

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03
Section 2 Module 1 Page 26

1 Introduction to the 9500 MPR-A Radio

1.19 MPT-HL RF Connection (RF Filter)


Transmit
Receive

RF Filter
Receive
Hot Standby RF switch
under RF filter

2 1 27
Product Overview
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Setup is for a 1+1 HSB system using a diplexer, with an RF switch for the transmitters and a 1:10 dB
coupler on the receivers.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03
Section 2 Module 1 Page 27

1 Introduction to the 9500 MPR-A Radio

1.20 TDM/PDH Access Modules


Access
peripherals

CSM-E/Core-E

PSU

DS3 Access

2xDS3

32xDS1

Controller

Transport and
radio peripherals
Flash
RAM

MPT

SFP

GigE

GigE

ETHERNET
SWITCH

GigE

ETHERNET
SWITCH
EAS/P8ETH

DS1 Access

2 1 28
Product Overview
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

TDM/PDH Interfaces: 32xDS1, 2xD3


The peripherals are independent modules connecting the CSM-E/Core-E to a set of different external
interfaces, through a high speed serial bus.
Available peripherals:
32 x DS1 local access modules
2 x DS3 local access modules
Ethernet packets are interfaced on the CSM-E/Core-E and EAS/P8ETH modules.

The PDH incoming traffic is converted into Ethernet packets and then sent to the Ethernet switch. Packet
overhead is optimized before it is to be sent through the air.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03
Section 2 Module 1 Page 28

1 Introduction to the 9500 MPR-A Radio

1.21 Access Modules


DS1, DS3, and 10/100/1000 base-T and Gigabit Ethernet interfaces
Circuit Emulation Services Over Ethernet (CESoETH) MEF8
Point-to-Point VLAN
Flexible aggregate capacity sharing DS1, DS3
10 Gigabit Packet Based Node
IEEE 802.1p and Diffserv QoS
Queue Management and Flow control ability
1+1 Equipment Protection Switching (EPS) available on All Cards

DS1

DS3
2 1 29
Product Overview
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

The 9500 MPR supports MEF8 structured agnostic emulation TDM services. The MEF8 (Metro Ethernet
Forum) Processing Block receives a bit stream from the DS3 interface and performs the following
functions:
Packetizes the incoming data to a pre-determined payload size
Encapsulates the payload into a packet format specified by the MEF8 standard for the emulated data

type. Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) and Circuit Emulation Services (CES) Control Word headers are
added.

CES is a bi-directional service consisting of 2 symmetrical data flows in opposite directions. For each
direction of the emulated circuit, there is a pair of CES interworking functions (IWF). A Metro
Ethernet Network (MEN)-bounds Ethernet frames and forwards them into the network. The
corresponding TDM-bound IWF extracts the TDM data from the Ethernet frames and recreates the
TDM service.
Adds the Ethernet header

CESoETH MEF8: Circuit Emulation Services over Ethernet


MEF8: Forum for implementation of the Emulation of PDH Circuits over MEN
Virtual LAN (VLAN) - A logical grouping of two or more nodes which are not necessarily on the same
physical network segment but which share the same IP network number. This is often associated with
switched Ethernet.
IEEE 802.1p (Priority Queuing)
Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03
Section 2 Module 1 Page 29

1 Introduction to the 9500 MPR-A Radio

1.22 Radio Interface Modules


Interfaces between MSS and ODUs

MOD300

MPTACC

2 1 30
Product Overview
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03
Section 2 Module 1 Page 30

1 Introduction to the 9500 MPR-A Radio

1.23 MSS Architecture


Cards in a protected configuration must be installed on the same row
(main card on the left, spare card on the right)
Module Protection supported:
6 unprotected ODU300s (3 protected pairs)
12 unprotected MPT-HLs (6 protected pairs)
8 MPT-HLs and 4 ODU300s
MSS-8

Slot 3
Slot 4
EAS/P8ETH, 32xDS1, 2xDS3 , MPTACC, MOD300 EAS/P8ETH, 32xDS1, 2xDS3 , MPTACC, MOD300
Slot 5
Slot 6
EAS/P8ETH, 32xDS1, 2xDS3 , MPTACC, MOD300 EAS/P8ETH, 32xDS1, 2xDS3 , MPTACC, MOD300
Slot 7
EAS/P8ETH, 32xDS1, 2xDS3 , MPTACC, MOD300

2 1 31
Product Overview
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

Slot 8
EAS/P8ETH, 32xDS1, 2xDS3 , MPTACC, MOD300

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03
Section 2 Module 1 Page 31

Slot 9
Fan

Slot 2
CSM-E/Core-E

Slot 1
CSM-E/Core-E

1 Introduction to the 9500 MPR-A Radio

1.24 Product Overview


Traditional PDH Radio

TDM DS1

DS1

Microwave Packet Radio

DS1
Packets

DS3

DS3

Ethernet
Ethernet

2 1 32
Product Overview
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

Data Aware packet


aggregation

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

9500 MPR-A offers a single packet matrix able to switch, aggregate and handle any of the possible
incoming traffic types with virtually no capacity limits (up to 10 GB/s).
Packet platforms fully support TDM
TDM platforms cannot evolve to packet platforms

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03
Section 2 Module 1 Page 32

Module summary
Basic concepts of the 9500 MPR-A Radio
Features and advantages of the 9500 MPR-A Radio:
Multiservice aggregation layer
Service awareness
Packet node
Network-management Platforms
Indoor transceivers
ODUs
The 9500 MPR-A Radio:
Control and Switching Module (CSM-E/Core-E)
Ethernet Access Switch (EAS/P8ETH) module
Microwave Packet Transport High Capacity, Long Haul (MPT-HL)
MPT-HL RF Connection (RF Filter)
Ethernet interfaces
ODUs
Radio interface modules
Access modules
Data path from the Access (Ethernet, DS3, and DS1) to the MPT-HL
Data path from the Access (Ethernet, DS3, and DS1) to the ODU
Data path from the Access (Ethernet, DS3, and DS1) to the MPT-HC
2 1 33
Product Overview
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03
Section 2 Module 1 Page 33

End of module
Overview

2 1 34
Product Overview
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03
Section 2 Module 1 Page 34

Do not delete this graphic elements in here:

Section 3
Product Architecture
Module 1
MSS Hardware
TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio)


Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)
TWT42013 Edition 1.1

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent @@YEAR

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 1 Page 1

Blank page

Document History
Edition

Date

Author

Remarks

01

2007-07-30

External Consultant

First edition

2008-08-30

Fisher, Sheldon

Convert to ANSI version for NAR

01.20

2008-10-21

01.30

2009-01-30

Fisher, Sheldon
Revisions following Pilot Class
This page is left blank intentionally
Fisher, Sheldon
Update to R1.1

01.31

2009-03-05

Fisher, Sheldon

Final Revisions

01

2009-06-23

Robinson, Ken

Rel 2.0

01.41

2009-07-23

Robinson, Ken

Revised after review

01.42

2009-08-04

Robinson, Ken

Revised after 2nd review

2.01

2010-07-30

Moehlenkamp, John

Revised to release 2.01

2.02

2010-11-30

Moehlenkamp, John

Revised to release 2.02

3.0

2011-02-28

Moehlenkamp, John

Revised to release 3.0

3.01

2011-06-29

Moehlenkamp, John

Revised to release 3.01

3.02

2011-11-15

Moehlenkamp, John

Updated format and revised to release 3.02

3.03

2012-02-07

Moehlenkamp, John

Revised to release 3.03

01.10

312

Product Architecture MSS Hardware


9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 1 Page 2

Module objectives
Upon completion of this module, you should be able to:
Describe the functionality of each card of the MSS-4 and -8

Control and Switching Module (CSM-E/Core-E)


Ethernet Access Switch (EAS/P8ETH)
DS1/P32E1DS1
DS3/P2E3DS3
MPTACC
MOD300
AUX
Fan

Describe the functionality of the +24/-48 Power Converter


Describe the functionality of the MSS-1c
Describe patch panels (Distributors)

313
Product Architecture MSS Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 1 Page 3

Module objectives [cont.]

314
Product Architecture MSS Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

This page is left blank intentionally

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 1 Page 4

Table of Contents
Switch to notes view!
1 Microwave Service Switch (MSS-8)
1.1 MSS-8 Overview
1.2 MSS-8 Cards
2 Microwave Service Switch (MSS-4)
2.1 MSS-4 Overview
2.2 MSS-4 Cards
3 Control and Switching Module/Core-E
3.1 CSM-E/Core-E Card
3.2 CSM-E/Core-E Card Block Diagram
3.3 CSM-E/Core-E Card Status LED
4 Ethernet Access Switch/P8ETH
4.1 P8ETH/EAS Card
4.2 P8ETH/EAS Card Block Diagram
4.3 P8ETH/EAS Card Status LED
5 DS1/P32E1DS1 Card
5.1 DS1/P32E1DS1 Card
5.2 DS1/P32E1DS1 Card Block Diagram
5.3 DS1/P32E1DS1 Card Status LED
6 DS3/P2E3DS3 Card
6.1 DS3/P2E3DS3 Card
6.2 DS3/P2E3DS3 Card Block Diagram
6.3 DS3/P2E3DS3 Card Status LED
37 1MPTACC
5
Card
Product Architecture MSS Hardware
9500 7.1
MPR (Microwave
Packet Radio)
Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)
MPTACC
Card
7.2 MPTACC Card Block Diagram
7.3 MPTACC Card Status LED
8 MOD300 Card
8.1 MOD300 Card
8.2 MOD300 Card Block Diagram
8.3 MOD300 Card Status LED
9 AUX Card
9.1 AUX Card
9.2 AUX Card Status LED
10 Fan Card
10.1 Fan Card
11 +24/-48 Volt Power Converter
11.1 +24/-48 Volt Power Converter
12 Power Injector
12.1 Power Injector
13 Microwave Service Switch (MSS-1c)
13.1 MSS-1c
13.2 MSS-1c Block Diagram
13.3 MSS-1c Status LED
14 Patch Panels
14.1 DS1 RJ-45 Patch Panel
14.2 DS1 Tributaries (Protected Pair)
14.3 DS1 D-Connector Patch Panel

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03

Page
7
8
9
11
12
13
15
16
18
19
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58

Table of Contents [cont.]


Switch to notes view!

316
Product Architecture MSS Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

This page is left blank intentionally

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03

1 Microwave Service Switch (MSS-8)

Refer to 9500 MPR Product Information,


3EM23952AHAA, UDS-101 for more details
317
Product Architecture MSS Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 1 Page 7

1 Microwave Service Switch (MSS-8)

1.1 MSS-8 Overview


The MSS-8 provides cross-connection, port aggregation, switching, and
equipment management.
314 Mbps full-duplex Ethernet transport capacity per channel
Consists of a module cage and backplane which provides nine slots:
y 2 dedicated slots (1 and 2) for CSM-E/Core-E cards
y 6 slots (3-8) for access or radio cards:
{ DS1
{ DS3
{ P8ETH/EAS
{ MPTACC
{ MOD300
{ AUX (slot 8 only)
y 1 dedicated slot (9) for the required fan card

318
Product Architecture MSS Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 1 Page 8

1 Microwave Service Switch (MSS-8)

1.2 MSS-8 Cards

CSM-E/Core-E
Fan
Main

Slots
1

Spare

P8ETH/EAS or
Access/Radio cards
319
Product Architecture MSS Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

General Rules:
One CSM-E/Core-E card is required (unprotected)
Can be protected with 2nd CSM-E/Core-E
One Flash card is required for every CSM-E/Core-E card
1 to 6 32xDS1 cards
1 to 6 2xDS3 cards
1 to 6 MOD300 cards
Fan card provides Major/Minor relay alarms and a Summary Relay for Major or Minor (usually tied to
PDU).

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 1 Page 9

Blank page
Switch to notes view!

3 1 10

This page intentionally left blank

Product Architecture MSS Hardware


9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 1 Page 10

2 Microwave Service Switch (MSS-4)

Refer to 9500 MPR Product Information,


3EM23952AHAA, UDS-117 for more details
3 1 11
Product Architecture MSS Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 1 Page 11

2 Microwave Service Switch (MSS-4)

2.1 MSS-4 Overview


The MSS-4 provides cross-connection, port aggregation, switching, and
equipment management.
314 Mbps full-duplex Ethernet transport capacity per channel
Consists of a module cage and backplane which provides five slots:
y 2 dedicated slots (1 and 2) for CSM-E/Core-E cards
y 2 slots (3 and 4) for access or radio cards:
{ DS1
{ DS3
{ P8ETH/EAS
A fully equipped Microwave Service Switch (MSS{ MPTACC
8) shelf provides up
to 314 Mb/s full-duplex Ethernet transport
{ MOD300
capacity per radio carrier channel.
{ AUX (slot 4 only)
y 1 dedicated slot (5) for the required fan card
Slots
5

3 1 12
Product Architecture MSS Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 1 Page 12

2 Microwave Service Switch (MSS-4)

2.2 MSS-4 Cards

CSM-E/Core-E
Fan
Main

Spare

P8ETH/EAS or
Access/Radio cards
3 1 13
Product Architecture MSS Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

General Rules:
One CSM-E/Core-E card is required (unprotected)
Can be protected with 2nd CSM-E/Core-E
One Flash card is required for every CSM-E/Core-E card
1 or 2 32xDS1 cards
1 or 2 2xDS3 cards
1 or 2 MOD300 cards
Fan card provides Major/Minor relay alarms and a Summary Relay for Major or Minor (usually tied to
PDU).

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 1 Page 13

Blank page
Switch to notes view!

3 1 14

This page intentionally left blank

Product Architecture MSS Hardware


9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 1 Page 14

3 Control and Switching Module/Core-E

Refer to 9500 MPR Product Information,


3EM23952AHAA, UDS-103 and UDS-111 for more details
3 1 15
Product Architecture MSS Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 1 Page 15

3 Control and Switching Module/Core-E

3.1 CSM-E/Core-E Card


Characteristics
Main system controller (manages communication between all of the
peripheral cards)
16 Gb/s Ethernet switch for traffic routing
Synchronization processor
Removable compact flash card for NE configuration
Embedded web server
Synchronous Ethernet support

Interfaces
4x Ethernet 10/100/1000 10Base-T ports (RJ45) (port 4 can be configured
for NMS)
2x GigE Ethernet SFP ports
1x Ethernet 10/100/1000 Base-T (Craft Terminal)
1x 2, 5,10 MHz synch-in/synch-out
1x mini-USB (not used)

System
Up to 2 units per shelf. Supports unprotected and 1+1 EPS protection
3 1 16
Product Architecture MSS Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Gigabit Ethernet serial internal interfaces between CSM-E/Core-E and peripherals


CSM-E/Core-E Macro Functions:
Controller
Layer 2+ Ethernet Switch, VLAN management and MAC based
Ethernet MAC learning
Cross-connect function for PDH and Data payload traffic;
For any packetized flow, the switch will be in charge to also manage the Equipment Protection
Switching (EPS).
Quality of Service (QoS) management.
Selection of the synchronization clock to be distributed to each plug-in.
The flash card stores the license, equipment software, equipment MIB, and equipment MAC address.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 1 Page 16

3 Control and Switching Module/Core-E

3.1 CSM-E/Core-E Card [cont.]


Module SFP transceiver sensitivity

3 1 17
Product Architecture MSS Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 1 Page 17

3 Control and Switching Module/Core-E

3.2 CSM-E/Core-E Card Block Diagram

GigE

3 1 18
Product Architecture MSS Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 1 Page 18

3 Control and Switching Module/Core-E

3.3 CSM-E/Core-E Card Status LED


Card status LED indicates the status of the printed circuit board:
Off card not equipped, not provisioned, or not powered
Blinking green download, booting, or flash card realignment in progress
Green in service, normal operation, and properly provisioned
Yellow in standby, properly provisioned as EPS
Blinking red card mismatch
NE Warning alarm
NE Abnormal
Red card failure

Link

Activity

NE minor alarm

Status

NE Major alarm

Ethernet ports 1-4

GigE Ethernet
SFP ports 5-6

3 1 19
Product Architecture MSS Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

Craft Terminal
USB Sync in/out
IT/TFC
(not used)

Reset

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

The CSM-E/Core-E consists of microprocessor and Ethernet switch circuits. The Ethernet Switch provides a
Quality of Service (QOS) mechanism to control all streams.
If QoS is disabled, all traffic inside the switch has the same priority. This means that for each switch port
there is only one queue, first in, first out (FIFO)
Three QoS settings in GUI are available as follows:
Disabled
802.1 priorities are set based on IEEE 802.1D-2004 Annex G User Priorities and Traffic Classes that

defines seven traffic types and corresponding user priority values.

DiffServ priorities are based on one of eight tags, each identifying one of eight traffic types and

corresponding user priority values.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 1 Page 19

Blank page
Switch to notes view!

3 1 20

This page intentionally left blank

Product Architecture MSS Hardware


9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 1 Page 20

4 Ethernet Access Switch/P8ETH

Refer to 9500 MPR Product Information,


3EM23952AHAA, UDS-107 for more details
3 1 21
Product Architecture MSS Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 1 Page 21

4 Ethernet Access Switch/P8ETH

4.1 P8ETH/EAS Card


Characteristics
MSS-to-MPT interface for all indoor configurations
Layer 2 switch, cross-connecting VLAN tagged Ethernet data to/from the
addressed MPT-HL
Traffic management for up to 4 directions using protected radios
Traffic management for up to 8 directions using not-protected radios
requires 2 P8ETH/EAS cards

Interfaces
Up to 4 10/100/1000 10Base-T Ethernet ports
Up to 4 GigE optical Ethernet SFP ports for MPT-HL or user traffic
Up to 4 MPT-HL Transceiver ports

System
Up to 2 units per shelf
Supports unprotected and 1+1 EPS protection

3 1 22
Product Architecture MSS Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

The P8ETH/EAS card provides four 10/100/1000 10Base-T Ethernet interfaces and four GigE optical
Ethernet SFP interfaces to the MPT-HL shelf.
MSS-8 shelf:

Supports three protected pairs of P8ETH/EAS cards or six unprotected P8ETH/EAS cards.

P8ETH/EAS is supported in slots 3-8 for unprotected radio configurations.

In protected radio configurations, a pair of P8ETH/EASs are required.

The main P8ETH/EAS is equipped in slots 3, 5, or7

The protect (spare) P8ETH/EAS is equipped in slots 4, 6, or 8 directly across from the main.

The protect card protects the radio if the main fails.

MSS-4 shelf:

Supports one protected pair of P8ETH/EAS cards or two unprotected P8ETH/EAS cards.

P8ETH/EAS is supported in slots 3 and 4 for unprotected radio configurations.

In protected radio configurations, a pair of P8ETH/EASs are required.

The main P8ETH/EAS is equipped in slot 3.

The protect (spare) P8ETH/EAS is equipped in slot 4 directly across from the main.

The protect card protects the radio if the main fails.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 1 Page 22

4 Ethernet Access Switch/P8ETH

4.2 P8ETH/EAS Card Block Diagram

3 1 23
Product Architecture MSS Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 1 Page 23

4 Ethernet Access Switch/P8ETH

4.3 P8ETH/EAS Card Status LED


Card status LED indicates the status of the printed circuit board:
Off card not equipped, not provisioned, or not powered
Blinking green download, booting, or flash card realignment in progress
Green in service, normal operation, and properly provisioned
Yellow in standby, properly provisioned as EPS
Blinking red card mismatch
Red card failure

Link

Status

Activity

Ethernet ports 1-4


3 1 24
Product Architecture MSS Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

GigE Ethernet SFP


ports 5-8
COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 1 Page 24

5 DS1/P32E1DS1 Card

Refer to 9500 MPR Product Information,


3EM23952AHAA, UDS-105 for more details
3 1 25
Product Architecture MSS Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 1 Page 25

5 DS1/P32E1DS1 Card

5.1 DS1/P32E1DS1 Card


Characteristics
1 to 32 DS1 interfaces
MEF-8 SAToP circuit emulation
Receives up to 32 DS1 signals, encapsulates into Ethernet packets (IWF), and
sends to cross-connections matrix
Receives Ethernet packets from the cross-connection matrix, extracts DS1
data, and sends to up to 32 DS1 interfaces

Interfaces
32 DS1 ANSI T1.102 SCSI connectors

System
1+1 EPS protection

3 1 26
Product Architecture MSS Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

SAToP: Structure-Agnostic TDM over Packet


In a radio link containing a DS3 connection, a maximum of five DS1 connections can be assigned.
Additional DS1 connections may be added to separate links that do not contain DS3 connections.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 1 Page 26

5 DS1/P32E1DS1 Card

5.2 DS1/P32E1DS1 Card Block Diagram

3 1 27
Product Architecture MSS Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

In the TX direction, the 32xDS1 card processes and encapsulates up to 32 DS1 input lines into 2 Ethernet
packets.
In the RX direction, the 32xDS1 card extracts data from the Ethernet data packets and processes the data
to provide up to 32 DS1 output lines.
The 32xDS1 access module performs the following macro functions:
Termination of 32 DS1 signals (32 DS1 bi-directional interfaces on the front panel)
Framed DS1 bi-directional alarm management
Encapsulation/Extraction of PDH data flows into/from standard Ethernet packets
Reconstruction of the original PDH Timing
Selection of the Active CSM-E/Core-E
Sending/getting Ethernet packets to the CSM-E/Core-E
Communication with the Controller for provisioning and status report

The module communicates with the CSM-E/Core-E Gigabit Ethernet Serial copper bi-directional interfaces
on the backplane.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 1 Page 27

5 DS1/P32E1DS1 Card

5.3 DS1/P32E1DS1 Card Status LED


Card status LED indicates the status of the printed circuit board:

Off card not equipped, not provisioned, or not powered


Blinking green download, booting, or flash card realignment in progress
Green in service, normal operation, and properly provisioned
Yellow in standby, properly provisioned as EPS
Blinking red card mismatch
Red card failure
Status

DS1 in/out
Ports 17-32
3 1 28
Product Architecture MSS Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

DS1 in/out
Ports 1-16

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

There are equipping options for the 32xDS1.


One 32xDS1 module is required in slot 5, 6, 7 or 8 for not protected configurations.
In protected radio configurations, two are required, the main module in slot 5 or 7 and the protect

(spare) module in the slot directly across from the main (slot 6 or 8). The protect (spare) 32xDS1
module protects the DS1 stream if the main 32xDS1 module fails.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 1 Page 28

6 DS3/P2E3DS3 Card

Refer to 9500 MPR Product Information,


3EM23952AHAA, UDS-106 for more details
3 1 29
Product Architecture MSS Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 1 Page 29

6 DS3/P2E3DS3 Card

6.1 DS3/P2E3DS3 Card


Characteristics
1 or 2 DS3 interfaces
MEF-8 SAToP circuit emulation
Receives up to 2 DS3 signals, encapsulates into Ethernet packets (IWF), and
sends to cross-connections matrix
Receives Ethernet packets from the cross-connection matrix, extracts DS3
data, and sends to up to 2 DS3 interfaces

Interfaces
4 Mini-BNC connectors

System
1+1 EPS protection

3 1 30
Product Architecture MSS Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

In a radio link containing a DS3 connection, a maximum of five DS1 connections can be assigned.
Additional DS1 connections may be added to separate links that do not contain DS3 connections.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 1 Page 30

6 DS3/P2E3DS3 Card

6.2 DS3/P2E3DS3 Card Block Diagram

3 1 31
Product Architecture MSS Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 1 Page 31

6 DS3/P2E3DS3 Card

6.3 DS3/P2E3DS3 Card Status LED


Card status LED indicates the status of the printed circuit board:

Off card not equipped, not provisioned, or not powered


Blinking green download, booting, or flash card realignment in progress
Green in service, normal operation, and properly provisioned
Yellow in standby, properly provisioned as EPS
Blinking red card mismatch
Red card failure
Status

Out
In
Line 1
3 1 32
Product Architecture MSS Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

Out
In
Line 2
COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 1 Page 32

7 MPTACC Card

Refer to 9500 MPR Product Information,


3EM23952AHAA, UDS-118 for more details
3 1 33
Product Architecture MSS Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 1 Page 33

7 MPTACC Card

7.1 MPTACC Card


Characteristics
Interface between CSM-E/Core-E and up to 2 MPT-HC/MC
MPT-HC EPS/HSB management

Interfaces

2 10/100/1000 10Base-T Ethernet ports (RJ45)


2 GigE optical Ethernet SFP ports
2 DC power supply ports
Power Feed over Ethernet (PFoE) function uses one electrical Ethernet cable
to carry Ethernet traffic and power supply inputs

System
1+1 EPS/HSB protection

3 1 34
Product Architecture MSS Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 1 Page 34

7 MPTACC Card

7.2 MPTACC Card Block Diagram

Digital
Processing

3 1 35
Product Architecture MSS Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 1 Page 35

7 MPTACC Card

7.3 MPTACC Card Status LED


Card status LED indicates the status of the printed circuit board:
Off card not equipped, not provisioned, or not powered
Blinking green download, booting, or flash card realignment in progress
Green in service, normal operation, and properly provisioned
Yellow in standby, properly provisioned as EPS
Blinking red card mismatch
Red card failure

Link

Activity

Ethernet ports 1-2

Status
Power emission status 1

GigE Ethernet
SFP ports 3-4

3 1 36
Product Architecture MSS Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

Power emission status 2

DC power port 1

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 1 Page 36

DC power port 2

8 MOD300 Card

Refer to 9500 MPR Product Information,


3EM23952AHAA, UDS-104 for more details
3 1 37
Product Architecture MSS Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 1 Page 37

8 MOD300 Card

8.1 MOD300 Card


Characteristics
Static modulation: 32/128/256 QAM (MD300 and MOD300EN)
Adaptive modulation: 4/16, 16/64 QAM (MOD300EN only)
Converts Ethernet packet data from the CSM-E/Core-E into a modulated IF
output signal that is applied to the ODU300
Demodulates IF signal from the ODU300, converts demodulated signal into a
digital IF signal, encapsulates the digital data into Ethernet packets, and
sends the packets to the CSM-E/Core-E

Interfaces
1 IF + DC power over COAX cable System
1+1 EPS and RPS protection
Warning
To prevent serious equipment damage, remove power from MOD300
prior to disconnecting IF cable.

3 1 38
Product Architecture MSS Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 1 Page 38

8 MOD300 Card

8.2 MOD300 Card Block Diagram

Warning
When replacing MOD300, always remove the card from the MSS shelf
prior to disconnecting IF cable.
3 1 39
Product Architecture MSS Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 1 Page 39

8 MOD300 Card

8.3 MOD300 Card Status LED


Card status LED indicates the status of the printed circuit board:

Off card not equipped, not provisioned, or not powered


Blinking green download, booting, or flash card realignment in progress
Green in service, normal operation, and properly provisioned
Yellow in standby, properly provisioned as EPS
Blinking red card mismatch
Status
Red card failure
Power Emission Status

IF cable to/from ODU300


Warning
To prevent serious equipment damage, remove power from MOD300
prior to disconnecting IF cable.
3 1 40
Product Architecture MSS Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 1 Page 40

9 AUX Card

Refer to 9500 MPR Product Information,


3EM23952AHAA, UDS-120 for more details
3 1 41
Product Architecture MSS Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 1 Page 41

9 AUX Card

9.1 AUX Card


Characteristics
Provides 13 housekeeping alarm points:
y
y
y
y

6 station alarm inputs


7 station control outputs
user provisionable alarm labels on a per alarm basis
user provisionable alarm active polarity on a per alarm basis

Interfaces
2 64Kbs RS-422/V.11 DCE service channels (for future use)
1 housekeeping connector (6 station alarm inputs and 7 station control
outputs

Supported in MSS-4 slot 4 and MSS-8 slot 8

3 1 42
Product Architecture MSS Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 1 Page 42

9 AUX Card

9.2 AUX Card Status LED


Card status LED indicates the status of the printed circuit board:

Off card not equipped, not provisioned, or not powered


Blinking green download, booting, or flash card realignment in progress
Green in service, normal operation, and properly provisioned
Yellow in standby, properly provisioned as EPS
Blinking red card mismatch
Red card failure
EOW

Service Channel 1

Status

Service Channel 2

Housekeeping

EOW Line Status

Note: EOW, Service Channels 1 and 2, and EOW Line Status for future use
3 1 43
Product Architecture MSS Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

EOW

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

- Engineering Express Order Wire

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 1 Page 43

Blank page
Switch to notes view!

3 1 44

This page intentionally left blank

Product Architecture MSS Hardware


9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 1 Page 44

10 Fan Card

Refer to 9500 MPR Product Information,


3EM23952AHAA, UDS-110 for more details
3 1 45
Product Architecture MSS Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 1 Page 45

10 Fan Card

10.1 Fan Card


Three fan card types supported:
Fan 2U card (basic fan card)
Fan 2U card with alarms
MSS-8 fan card with alarms
Fan 1U card

Provides forced air


flow for MSS cooling
MSS-4 fan card

Fan

Summary

Batt A

Major

Batt B

Minor

External Alarms

3 1 46
Product Architecture MSS Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

MSS-8 basic fan card

ACO/LT

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Fan, Batt A, Batt B, and ACO/LT not supported

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 1 Page 46

11 +24/-48 Volt Power Converter

Refer to 9500 MPR Product Information,


3EM23952AHAA, UDS-123 for more details
3 1 47
Product Architecture MSS Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 1 Page 47

11 +24/-48 Volt Power Converter

11.1 +24/-48 Volt Power Converter


The +24/-48 Vdc power converter converts +24 Vdc office power to
48 Vdc for the MSS-4/8:
Resides in slot 4 of the MSS-4 and slot 4, 6, or 8 in the MSS-8.
Office power connected to the PDU which connects to the power converter.
The output of the power converter (-48 Vdc) is connected to the MSS-4/8
power connector(s).
Supports unprotected and protected power arrangements.

Note: When the MPT-HL is powered using +24 VDC, a +24 VDC power
converter must be used to connect to the MSS-4/8.
Main power converter

-48 V out

+24 V in

3 1 48
Product Architecture MSS Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

Protect power converter

-48 V out

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 1 Page 48

+24 V in

12 Power Injector

Refer to 9500 MPR Product Information,


3EM23952AHAA, UDS-122 for more details
3 1 49
Product Architecture MSS Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 1 Page 49

12 Power Injector

12.1 Power Injector


The power injector is an indoor device that provides power to up to two
MPT-HC V2s through a common Ethernet cable
Inputs:
Ethernet traffic
Power supply voltage (-48 Vdc)

Outputs Ethernet traffic and DC voltage on a single cable (PFoE)

3 1 50
Product Architecture MSS Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 1 Page 50

13 Microwave Service Switch (MSS-1c)

Refer to 9500 MPR-A MSS-1c User Manual,


3EM24571ABAA for more details
3 1 51
Product Architecture MSS Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 1 Page 51

13 Microwave Service Switch (MSS-1c)

13.1 MSS-1c

The MSS-1c provides user port interface, cross-connection, and switching


management with up to 314 Mbps full-duplex Ethernet transport capacity
per channel
The MSS-1c is a compact IDU that complements the existing portfolio
addressing the last mile, the far end application in nodal solution and
cost optimized point-to-point applications
Its small size drastically reduces space consumption
Supports one MPT-HC, MPT-HC V2, or MPT-MC ODU
Radio configuration is 1+0

Interfaces

2x Ethernet 10/100/1000 10Base-T ports


2x GigE Ethernet SFP ports
1x Ethernet 10/100/1000 Base-T (Craft Terminal)
T1

3 1 52
Product Architecture MSS Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 1 Page 52

13 Microwave Service Switch (MSS-1c)

13.2 MSS-1c Block Diagram

* Indicates not supported


3 1 53
Product Architecture MSS Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 1 Page 53

13 Microwave Service Switch (MSS-1c)

13.3 MSS-1c Status LED


NE Warning alarm
Status

NE Major alarm
1-8

E1/T1 ports

9-16

NE minor alarm
Link

Activity

RJ-45 MPT 1-2


3-4 Ethernet ports 1-2
Optical
SFP ports 1-2

RJ-45 HK and CT

RJ-45 NMS 1-2

Optical SFP port 2, MPT port 2, and house keeping port not supported
3 1 54
Product Architecture MSS Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 1 Page 54

NE Abnormal

14 Patch Panels

Refer to 9500 MPR Product Information,


3EM23952AHAA, UDS-114 and 115 for more details
3 1 55
Product Architecture MSS Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 1 Page 55

14 Patch Panels

14.1 DS1 RJ-45 Patch Panel


Converts DS1 card SCSI connectors to 32 RJ-45 connectors
Front

Rear

3 1 56
Product Architecture MSS Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 1 Page 56

14 Patch Panels

14.2 DS1 Tributaries (Protected Pair)


Main side

MSS shelf

Protect side

DS1 module

DS1 RJ-45 Patch Panel 100 Ohm Rear


3 1 57
Product Architecture MSS Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 1 Page 57

14 Patch Panels

14.3 DS1 D-Connector Patch Panel


Converts DS1 card SCSI connectors to 4 37-position DSUB connectors
Front

Rear

3 1 58
Product Architecture MSS Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 1 Page 58

Module summary
Cards of the MSS-4 and -8:

CSM-E/Core-E
P8ETH/EAS
DS1/P32E1DS1
DS3/P2E3DS3
MPTACC
MOD300
AUX
Fan

+24/-48 Power Converter


Power Injector
MSS-1c
Patch panels (Distributors)

3 1 59
Product Architecture MSS Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 1 Page 59

End of module
MSS Hardware

3 1 60
Product Architecture MSS Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 1 Page 60

Do not delete this graphic elements in here:

Section 3
Product Architecture
Module 2
MPT Hardware
TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio)


Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)
TWT42013 Edition 1.1

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent @@YEAR

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 2 Page 1

Blank page

322
Product Architecture MPT Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Document History
Edition

Date

This page is left blank intentionally


Author
Remarks

01

2009-06-23

Robinson, Ken

Rel 2.0

01.41

2009-07-23

Robinson, Ken

Revised after review

01.42

2009-08-04

Robinson, Ken

Revised after 2nd review

2.01

2010-07-30

Moehlenkamp, John

Revised to release 2.01

2.02

2010-11-30

Moehlenkamp, John

Revised to release 2.02

3.0

2011-02-28

Moehlenkamp, John

Revised to release 3.0

3.01

2011-06-29

Moehlenkamp, John

Revised to release 3.01

3.02

2011-11-15

Moehlenkamp, John

Updated format and revised to release 3.02

3.03

2012-02-07

Moehlenkamp, John

Revised to release 3.03

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 2 Page 2

Module objectives
Upon completion of this module, you should be able to:
Describe the functionality of the Microwave Packet Transport High Capacity,
Long Haul (MPT-HL)
y Radio Transceiver
y MPT-HL to RF
y MPT-HL from MSS

Radio Configuration and Switching


y 1+0 unprotected
y 1+1 Hot Standby (HSB)
y Hot Standby Space Diversity (HSSD)
y Frequency Diversity
y MPT-HL Characteristics

323
Product Architecture MPT Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 2 Page 3

Module objectives [cont.]

324
Product Architecture MPT Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

This page is left blank intentionally

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 2 Page 4

Table of Contents
Switch to notes view!
1 Microwave Packet Transport-Long Haul (MPT-HL)
1.1 MPT-HL Overview
1.2 Radio Transceiver Cards
1.3 MPT-HL to RF
1.4 Interface to the MPT-HL from MSS-8
2 MPT-HL Transceiver
2.1 MPT-HL Transceiver
2.2 MPT-HL Transceiver Status LED
2.3 MPT-HL Transceiver LEDs
3 Radio Configuration and Switching
3.1 MPT-HL
3.2 1+0 unprotected
3.3 1+1 Hot Standby (HSB)
3.4 Hot Standby
3.5 Hot Standby Space Diversity (HSSD)
3.6 Space Diversity
3.7 1+1 Frequency Diversity
4 All Indoor Mount Configurations
4.1 All Indoor Mount - 1+0 Drop and Insert Repeater
4.2 All Indoor Mount - 1+0 4-Way Junction
4.3 All Indoor Mount - 1+1 HSB Drop and Insert Repeater
4.4 All Indoor Mount - 1+1 HSB 4-Way Junction
35 2Characteristics
5
Product Architecture MPT Hardware
9500 5.1
MPR (Microwave
Radio) Operations
& Maintenance
R3.03 (ANSI)
TDMPacket
Circuit
Service
Profile
example

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03

Page
7
8
9
10
11
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
22
23
24
25
27
28
29
30
31
33
34

Table of Contents [cont.]


Switch to notes view!

326
Product Architecture MPT Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

This page is left blank intentionally

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03

1 Microwave Packet Transport-Long Haul


(MPT-HL)

Refer to 9500 MPR Product Information,


3EM23952AHAA, UDS-102 for more details
327
Product Architecture MPT Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 2 Page 7

1 Microwave Packet Transport-Long Haul (MPT-HL)

1.1 MPT-HL Overview

The MPT-HL is a radio transceiver for long haul applications:


Provides an all indoor solution when used in conjunction with the 9500 MPR
MSS-4 or -8 shelf equipped with EAS/P8ETHs
Consists of a module cage and backplane which provides two slots dedicated
for 2 MPT-HL transceiver cards

Main Side (Channel 1)

328
Product Architecture MPT Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

Spare Side (Channel 0)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

It features high transmitter output power and an all-indoor design.


The MPT-HL shelf provides space for one or two radio transceivers that support 1+0 and 1+1 configurations.
The MPT-HL shelf provides the RF filter and antenna interface.
1 or 2 transceiver modules
Waveguide filters
RF switch and RF cable assemblies

RF Frequency Range: 5.8 GHz, lower and upper 6 GHz, 10.5 GHz, and 11GHz
The microwave unlicensed band link with Ethernet transport may be used for IP Node B backhaul in the

city where they want to remove the leased line (sometimes called the last mile backhaul).

The MSS-8 can be configured with a maximum of eight optional MPT-HL modules; four protected modules,
eight non-protected modules, or a combination of protected and non-protected modules.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 2 Page 8

1 Microwave Packet Transport-Long Haul (MPT-HL)

1.2 Radio Transceiver Cards

Main Side (Channel 1)

SFP port

Debug Port

329
Product Architecture MPT Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

Spare Side (Channel 0)

Battery
Power

PA
0=Transmit off
1=Transmit on

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 2 Page 9

1 Microwave Packet Transport-Long Haul (MPT-HL)

1.3 MPT-HL to RF

RF filter connected to the rear of the MPT-HL


Two views looking down

3 2 10
Product Architecture MPT Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

When using the indoor transceiver (MPT-HL) shelf with RF filters in lieu of the ODU, the signal is carried to
and from the Ethernet Access Switch (MSS shelf) by the Small form-factor pluggable transceiver (SFP)
cable assembly to the MPT-HL shelf.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 2 Page 10

1 Microwave Packet Transport-Long Haul (MPT-HL)

1.4 Interface to the MPT-HL from MSS-8

MPT-HL

GigE

GigE

SFP

SFP

EAS/P8ETH

CSM-E/Core-E
3 2 11
Product Architecture MPT Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

MPT-HL

EAS/P8ETH

MSS-8

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

MPT-HL
The MPT-HL is a radio transceiver for long haul applications.
MPT-HL features high transmitter output power and an all-indoor design, which is a traditional requirement.
The interface to the MPT-HL is a Gigabit Ethernet (GigE) connection, which when connected to the MSS-8,
supports both traditional TDM and IP microwave solutions.
Supports the 5.8 GHz unlicensed band, lower and upper 6 GHz licensed bands, 10.5 GHz band, and 11 GHz
band.
The MPT-HL facilitates replacement of existing long haul systems and a convenient migration to IP.
The interface to the MPT-HL is a Gigabit Ethernet (GigE) connection, which when connected to the MSS-8,
supports both traditional TDM and IP microwave solutions.
The MPT-HL is enabled automatically when the associated MSS-8 EAS/P8ETH module is enabled.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 2 Page 11

Blank page
Switch to notes view!

3 2 12

This page intentionally left blank

Product Architecture MPT Hardware


9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 2 Page 12

2 MPT-HL Transceiver

Refer to 9500 MPR Product Information,


3EM23952AHAA, UDS-109 for more details
3 2 13
Product Architecture MPT Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 2 Page 13

2 MPT-HL Transceiver

2.1 MPT-HL Transceiver


The MPT-HL Transceiver card is a microprocessor controlled RF transceiver
that interfaces the MSS EAS/P8ETH MPT-HL port with the antenna.
The MPT-HL Transceiver manages:

transmit and receive frequencies


transmit power
alarming
performance monitoring

5.8 unlicensed
L6 and U6
7
8
10.5
11

Frequencies (GHz):

Bandwidths: 5, 10, 30, 40 MHz


Adaptive Modulations: 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, and 256 QAM
Static Modulations: 32, 64, 128, and 256 QAM
Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) support
3 2 14
Product Architecture MPT Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 2 Page 14

2 MPT-HL Transceiver

2.2 MPT-HL Transceiver Status LED


Card status LED indicates the status of the printed circuit board:
Off card not equipped, not provisioned, or not powered
Blinking green download or booting in progress
Green in service, normal operation, and properly provisioned
Yellow in standby, properly provisioned
Blinking green/red properly provisioned. TX or RX equipment or signal fault.
EPS or RPS currently in-service/active. Traffic is probably affected
Blinking yellow/red properly provisioned. TX
or RX signal fault. EPS and RPS currently
in standby. Traffic may be affected
Blinking red no communication between
MPT-HL Transceiver and EAS/P8ETH
Red card failure
Status
Activity
Batt Power
PA

SFP port
3 2 15
Product Architecture MPT Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

Link

Craft Terminal

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

SFP Port -Connection to EAS Card in MSS-8 Shelf


Link, Activity - Ethernet Link LED(s)
Craft Terminal- Not used. Engineering Debug Port
Power Emission Status- RF Power Out
Battery Power- 48 Vdc connection
PA- 0 = PA OFF; PA-1 = PA ON

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 2 Page 15

Power Emission Status

2 MPT-HL Transceiver

2.3 MPT-HL Transceiver LEDs


Activity

Link

Link (L)

Off
Green

S - Module Status

- Power Emission Status

Link Down
Link Up

Activity (A)

Off
No Tx/Rx activity
Blinking Yellow Tx/Rx activity

Power Emission Status (M) LED

Off

Green
Yellow
Red

No output power (e.g.: TPS in standby, software booting, or


FPGA download in progress)
Normal output power
Forced squelch enabled on craft terminal
Abnormal output power

3 2 16
Product Architecture MPT Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 2 Page 16

3 Radio Configuration and Switching

3 2 17
Product Architecture MPT Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 2 Page 17

3 Radio Configuration and Switching

3.1 MPT-HL

Front

Rear
To Antenna

Tx

RF Filter
Rx

3 2 18
Product Architecture MPT Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

The CSM-E/Core-E platform, with multiplexing and symmetrical cross-connection functions, is able to manage
different radio directions, with the possibility to add-drop tributaries in case of local PDH or Ethernet
accesses.
The 9500 MPR-A supports up to 12 RF links for operation on the same or different frequency bands using the
MSS-8 Unit.
Supports the 5.8 GHz unlicensed band, lower and upper 6 GHz licensed bands, 10.5 GHz band, and 11 GHz
band.
9500 MPR-A supports a mix of non-protected, protected, or diversity operation for single link, repeater, or
star radio configurations.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 2 Page 18

3 Radio Configuration and Switching

3.2 1+0 unprotected


MPT-HL

1+0 (Non-Standby)

3 2 19
Product Architecture MPT Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

RF Filter rear view

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

The MPT-HL will support multiple protection configurations to allow the customer to select the right mix of
cost and reliability for a particular application.
The 1+0 configuration means that the traffic is unprotected.
In the 1+0 configuration each MPT-HL functions independently of the other MPT-HL instances in the

system.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 2 Page 19

3 Radio Configuration and Switching

3.3 1+1 Hot Standby (HSB)


MPT-HL

Hot Standby 1:10 coupler

3 2 20
Product Architecture MPT Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

RF Filter rear view

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 2 Page 20

3 Radio Configuration and Switching

3.3 1+1 Hot Standby (HSB) [cont.]

3 2 21
Product Architecture MPT Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 2 Page 21

3 Radio Configuration and Switching

3.4 Hot Standby

Rx

MPT-HL Main
RF Filter

Tx

Tx Switch
Control Signal

Tx

MPT-HL Spare

Rx
3 2 22
Product Architecture MPT Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

1:10

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Hot Standby
1+1 Hot Standby (HSB) Single Antenna (SA)
This configuration requires one frequency and one antenna.
Each MPT-HL Transceiver receives a signal from the antenna through a coupler.
Each MPT-HL Transceiver provides a transmit signal to a transmit relay switch.
The transmit relay will select one of the MPT-HL Transceivers as the source of the transmit signal sent

to the coupler. The transmit relay is controlled by a General Purpose I/O (GPIO) pin on the spare MPTHL Transceiver.

The transmit relay will default to the main instance if the spare is down.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 2 Page 22

3 Radio Configuration and Switching

3.5 Hot Standby Space Diversity (HSSD)


MPT-HL

Front view

Hot Standby with Space Diversity


RF Filter

RF Filter

3 2 23
Product Architecture MPT Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 2 Page 23

Rear view

3 Radio Configuration and Switching

3.6 Space Diversity


Filter
Rx
Waveguide

MPT-HL Main
Tx

Tx

MPT-HL Spare
Rx
Waveguide

Filter

3 2 24
Product Architecture MPT Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Space Diversity
Space Diversity configuration requires one frequency and two antennas.
Each MPT-HL Transceiver receives a signal from a dedicated antenna.
Only one of the antennas is used for transmission.
Each MPT-HL Transceiver provides a transmit signal to a transmit relay switch.
The transmit relay selects one of the MPT-HL Transceivers as the source of the transmit signal sent to the

main antenna.

The transmit relay is controlled by a GPIO pin on the spare MPT-HL Transceiver.
The transmit relay defaults to the main instance if the spare is down.

By spacing the two antennas a few wavelengths apart, the two MPT-HL Transceivers will experience
uncorrelated fading and can switch between the received signals in a hitless manner to provide a greater
degree of availability over the radio link.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 2 Page 24

3 Radio Configuration and Switching

3.7 1+1 Frequency Diversity

TDM

EAS/P8ETH

C
S
M

EAS/P8ETH

MPT-HL Main

Transmit Filter

MPT-HL Spare

Transmit Filter

Ethernet
Receive Filter

Best received signal used


Receive Filter

3 2 25
Product Architecture MPT Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1+1 Frequency Diversity


Frequency Diversity configuration requires two frequencies and one antenna.
Each MPT-HL Transceiver receives a signal from the same antenna.
Each MPT-HL Transceiver provides a transmit signal to the same antenna.

Frequency Diversity transmits two different frequencies and receives two different frequencies from the
remote-radio. It will select the best signal received.
Frequency Diversity relies on the fact that fading is different at different frequencies:

The transmit relay will select one of the MPT-HL Transceivers as the source of the transmit signal sent
to the main antenna.
By using different frequencies, the two MPT-HL Transceivers will experience uncorrelated fading and
can switch between the received signals in a hitless manner to provide a greater degree of availability
over the radio link.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 2 Page 25

Blank page
Switch to notes view!

3 2 26

This page intentionally left blank

Product Architecture MPT Hardware


9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 2 Page 26

4 All Indoor Mount Configurations

Refer to 9500 MPR Product Information,


3EM23952AHAA, 9500 MPR General System Description
for more details
3 2 27
Product Architecture MPT Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 2 Page 27

4 All Indoor Mount Configurations

4.1 All Indoor Mount - 1+0 Drop and Insert Repeater

3 2 28
Product Architecture MPT Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 2 Page 28

4 All Indoor Mount Configurations

4.2 All Indoor Mount - 1+0 4-Way Junction

3 2 29
Product Architecture MPT Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 2 Page 29

4 All Indoor Mount Configurations

4.3 All Indoor Mount - 1+1 HSB Drop and Insert Repeater

3 2 30
Product Architecture MPT Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 2 Page 30

4 All Indoor Mount Configurations

4.4 All Indoor Mount - 1+1 HSB 4-Way Junction

3 2 31
Product Architecture MPT Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 2 Page 31

Blank page
Switch to notes view!

3 2 32

This page intentionally left blank

Product Architecture MPT Hardware


9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 2 Page 32

5 Characteristics

3 2 33
Product Architecture MPT Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 2 Page 33

5 Characteristics

5.1 TDM Circuit Service Profile example

Frequency
BW

Channel
BW

Modulation

MHz

QAM

Maximum
Radio Link
or Eth
Capacity
Mb/s

Equivalent
Capacity
TDM2ETH
Ethernet
Link
DS1

5.8

10

32

37.32

5.8, 6L, 6U, 11

128

25.8

5.8, 6L, 6U, 11

10

128

5.8

30

5.8, 6L, 6U, 11


5.8, 6L, 6U, 11

Equivalent
Capacity
TDM2TDM
Radio Link
DS1

18

22

52.64

25

31

32

114.22

55

67

30

128

160.17

78

95

30

128

183.30

89

108

Note: For additional modulation options, refer to the documentation


3 2 34
Product Architecture MPT Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

The table summaries the relations among Radio capacity, channeling scheme, and modulation (Static Modulation).
The relationship of these parameters will be covered again when we discuss the channel bandwidth, modulation and
capacity settings using the GUI.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 2 Page 34

Module summary
Functionality of the MPT-HL
Radio Transceiver
MPT-HL to RF
MPT-HL from MSS-8

Radio Configuration and Switching


1+0 unprotected
1+1 Hot Standby (HSB)
Hot Standby Space Diversity (HSSD)
Frequency Diversity
MPT-HL Characteristics

3 2 35
Product Architecture MPT Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 2 Page 35

Blank page
Switch to notes view!

3 2 36

This page intentionally left blank

Product Architecture MPT Hardware


9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 2 Page 36

Exercise

Lab Exercise 1
9500 MPR Hardware Orientation
Time allowed:

3 2 37
Product Architecture MPT Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 2 Page 37

End of module
MPT Hardware

3 2 38
Product Architecture MPT Hardware
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 2 Page 38

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 3 Page 1

Document History
Edition

Date

Author

Remarks

01

2007-07-30

External Consultant

First edition

01.10

2008-08-30

Fisher, Sheldon

Convert to ANSI version for NAR

01.20

2008-10-21

This page
is left blank intentionally
Fisher,
Sheldon
Revisions following Pilot Class

01.30

2009-01-30

Fisher, Sheldon

Update to R1.1

01.31

2009-03-05

Fisher, Sheldon

Final Revisions

01.40

2009-06-15

Robinson, Ken

Revised for release 2.0

01.41

2009-07-27

Robinson, Ken

Revised after review

01.42

2009-08-04

Robinson, Ken

Revised after 2nd review

2.01

2010-07-30

Moehlenkamp, John

Revised to release 2.01

2.02

2010-11-30

Moehlenkamp, John

Revised to release 2.02

3.0

2011-02-28

Moehlenkamp, John

Revised to release 3.0

3.01

2011-06-29

Moehlenkamp, John

Revised to release 3.01

3.02

2011-11-15

Moehlenkamp, John

Updated format and revised to release 3.02

3.03

2012-02-07

Moehlenkamp, John

Revised to release 3.03

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 3 Page 2

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 3 Page 3

This page is left blank intentionally

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 3 Page 4

Page
1 Outdoor Unit 300
1.1 ODU300
1.2 ODU300 Block Diagram
1.3 ODU300 External Connectors
1.4 ODU300 and Antenna
1.5 ODU300 Mounting Options
2 Microwave Packet Transport - High Capacity (MPT-HC)
2.1 MPT-HC
2.2 MPT-HC Block Diagram
2.3 MPT-HC External Connectors
2.4 MPT-HC and Antenna
2.5 MPT-HC Interfaces
3 Microwave Packet Transport - High Capacity V2 (MPT-HC V2)
3.1 MPT-HC V2
3.2 MPT-HC V2 Block Diagram
3.3 MPT-HC V2 Interfaces
4 Split Mount Configurations
4.1 Stand-Alone Shelf
4.1 Split Mount - 1 + 0 Terminal
4.2 Split Mount - 1 + 0 Drop and Insert Repeater
4.3 Split Mount - 1 + 1 Drop and Insert Repeater
4.4 Split Mount - 1 + 0 4-Way Junction
4.5 Split Mount - Single 2 + 0 XPIC
4.6 Split Mount - Double 1 + 1 HSB Co-channel XPIC

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 3 Page 5

7
8
9
10
12
13
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
27
28
28
29
30
31
32
33

This page is left blank intentionally

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 3 Page 6

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 3 Page 7

The ODU300 includes a waveguide antenna port, Type-N female connector for the ODU cable, BNC
female connector (with captive protection cap) for RSSI access, and a grounding stud.

The ODUs are designed for direct antenna attachment via a mounting collar supplied with the
antenna.

ODU polarization is determined by the position of a polarization rotator fitted within the mounting
collar.

A remote ODU mounting kit is available as an option. These may be used to connect an ODU to a
standard antenna, or to a dual-polarized antenna for co-channel link operation.

ODUs are fixed for Tx High or Tx Low operation.

Where two ODUs are to be connected to a single antenna for hot-standby or frequency diversity
configurations, a direct-mounting coupler is used.

ODUs are frequency-band specific, but within each band are capacity-independent up to their design
maximums.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 3 Page 8

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 3 Page 9

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 3 Page 10

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 3 Page 11

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 3 Page 12

The ODU mounts directly to an Antenna: Non-protected.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 3 Page 13

This page intentionally left blank

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 3 Page 14

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 3 Page 15

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 3 Page 16

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 3 Page 17

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 3 Page 18

RF couplers are available for equal or unequal loss operation:


Equal loss is nominally 3 dB
Unequal loss is nominally 1/10 dB.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 3 Page 19

RF couplers are available for equal or unequal loss operation:


Equal loss is nominally 3 dB
Unequal loss is nominally 1/10 dB.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 3 Page 20

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 3 Page 21

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 3 Page 22

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 3 Page 23

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 3 Page 24

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 3 Page 25

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 3 Page 26

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 3 Page 27

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 3 Page 28

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 3 Page 29

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 3 Page 30

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 3 Page 31

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 3 Page 32

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 3 Page 33

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 3 Page 34

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 3 Page 35

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 3 Page 36

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 3 Page 37

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 3 Page 38

This page intentionally left blank

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 3 Page 39

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03
Section 3 Module 3 Page 40

Do not delete this graphic elements in here:

Section 4
NE Operation
Module 1
Operator GUI Interface
TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio)


Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)
TWT42013 Edition 1.1

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent @@YEAR

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 1

Blank page

Document History
Edition

Date

Author

Remarks

01

2007-07-30

External Consultant

First edition

01.10

2008-09-30

Fisher, Sheldon

Convert to ANSI version for NAR

2008-10-21

Fisher, Sheldon

Revisions after Pilot Class

01.30

2009-01-30

01.31

2009-03-05

Fisher, Sheldon
Upgrade to R1.1
This page is left blank intentionally
Fisher, Sheldon
Final Revisions

01.40

2009-06-16

Robinson, Ken

Revised to release 2.0

01.41

2009-07-20

Robinson, Ken

Revised after review

01.42

2009-08-04

Robinson, Ken

Revised after 2nd review

2.01

2010-07-30

Moehlenkamp, John

Revised to release 2.01

2.02

2010-11-30

Moehlenkamp, John

Revised to release 2.02

3.0

2011-02-28

Moehlenkamp, John

Revised to release 3.0

3.01

2011-06-29

Moehlenkamp, John

Revised to release 3.01

3.02

2011-11-15

Moehlenkamp, John

Updated format and revised to release 3.02

3.03

2012-02-07

Moehlenkamp, John

Revised to release 3.03

01.20

412

NE Operation Operator GUI Interface


9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 2

Module objectives
Upon completion of this module, you should be able to:
Activate the Network Element Overview (NEtO) application
Connect to a 9500 MPR-A either via a network connection or directly to the NMS
(Craft) terminal
Use the menus and tabs to observe and configure the 9500 MPR-A Network
Elements
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y

Tool Bars
Alarm & State Panels
Equipment Tab
Protection Tab
Synchronization Tab
Connections Tab
MPT-HL Settings
Radio Modem Settings
Local Configuration
NTP Configuration

413
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 3

Module objectives [cont.]

414
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

This page is left blank intentionally

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 4

Table of Contents
Switch to notes view!
1 Network Element Overview (NEtO)
1.1 Activate NEtO
1.2 NEtO Main Screen
1.2.1 Site Database and Viewing Options
1.2.2 NEtO Main Screen - Alarm Supervision
2 Connect to NE - Direct Method
2.1 Connect to NE - Direct Method
2.2 NE Main View
3 Connect to NE - Database Method
3.1 Create Favorite NEs Database
3.2 Connect to NE - Database Method
3.3 NE Main View
4 Main View
4.1 NE Main View
4.2 NE Main View - Tool Bars
4.3 NE Main View - Severity Alarm Synthesis Area
4.4 NE Main View - Domain Alarm Synthesis Area
4.5 NE Main View - Alarm & State Panels
4.6 NE Main View - Main Menu Bar
4.7 NE Main View Tab Windows - Equipment Tab
4.8 NE Main View Tab Windows - Protection Schemes Tab
4.9 Protection Scheme Parameters - Restoration Criteria
415
4.10 NE Main View Tab Windows - Synchronization Tab
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)
4.11 NE Main View Tab Windows - Connections Tab
4.12 NE Main View Tab Windows - Connections Tab - Help
5 MPT-HL Transceiver Radio Channel
5.1 Equipment View - MPT-HL
5.2 Equipment View - MPT-HL - Settings
5.3 Equipment View - MPT-HL
5.4 Equipment View - Settings Tab
5.5 Equipment View - Settings Tab (Presetting Mode)
5.6 Equipment View - Settings Tab
5.7 Equipment View - Settings Tab - Alarm Profile
6 MOD300 Radio Channel
6.1 Equipment View - Radio Modem
6.2 Radio Modem Settings Tab - Adaptive Modulation Mode
6.3 Radio Modem Settings Tab - Presetting Mode
6.4 Radio Modem Settings Tab - Presetting Mode with ATPC
6.5 Radio Modem Measurements Tab
6.6 Radio Modem Power Measurements Graphic
7 MPT-HC Radio Channel
7.1 Equipment View - Radio Modem
7.2 Radio Modem Settings Tab - Adaptive Modulation Mode
7.3 Radio Modem Settings Tab - Presetting Mode
7.4 Radio Modem Settings Tab - Presetting Mode with ATPC
7.5 Radio Modem Measurements Tab
7.6 Radio Modem Power Measurements Graphic
8 Configuration Menu
8.1 Configuration Menu
8.2 Configuration Menu - NE Time Configuration
8.3 Network Configuration - Local Configuration
8.4 Network Configuration - NTP Configuration
8.5 Network Configuration - IP Static Routing Configuration
8.6 Network Configuration - OSPF Area Configuration
8.7 Network Configuration - Routing Information
COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Page
7
8
9
10
11
13
14
17
19
20
22
27
29
30
31
32
33
34
36
37
39
40
41
42
43
45
46
47
48
49
50
52
53
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
71
72
73
74
76
77
79
81

Table of Contents [cont.]


Switch to notes view!
8.8 Alarm Severities
8.9 Configuration Menu - System Settings
8.10 DiffServ - Class of Service
8.11 Configuration Menu - Cross-Connections
8.12 Configuration Menu - Ring Configuration
8.13 Configuration Menu - Ethernet Ring Instance
8.14 Configuration Menu - LAG Configuration
8.15 Configuration Menu - QoS Configuration
8.15.1 Queue Scheduling
8.15.2 Queue Size
8.15.3 Classification
8.15.4 802.1p
8.15.5 DiffServ
8.16 Configuration Menu - XPIC Configuration
8.17 Configuration Menu - VLAN Configuration
8.18 Configuration Menu - Profiles Management
8.19 Configuration Menu - Ethernet Features Shell
8.20 Current Configuration View
9 Supervision Menu
9.1 Supervision Menu
9.2 Supervision Menu - Access State
9.3 Supervision Menu - Restart NE
4 1 Supervision
6
9.4
Menu - Restart MPT
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9.5
Supervision
Menu
- &MIB
Management
9500 MPR
(Microwave Packet Radio)
Operations
Maintenance
R3.03 (ANSI)
9.6 MIB Management - Backup
9.7 MIB Management - Restore/Activate
9.8 MIB Management - Remove file
9.9 Supervision Menu - SW License
9.10 Supervision Menu - SW License Window
10 Software Download Menu
10.1 SW Download Menu
10.2 SW Download Menu - Server Access Configuration
10.3 SW Download Menu - Init SW Download
10.4 SW Download Menu - SW Status
10.5 SW Download Menu - SW Status Detail

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Page
82
84
86
87
89
93
95
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
108
109
110
111
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
125
126
127
128
129
130

1 Network Element Overview (NEtO)

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration,


3EM23954AHAA, DLP-100 for more details
417
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 7

1 Network Element Overview (NEtO)

1.1 Activate NEtO

Ensure computer is connected to Craft Terminal, directly or through a


network
Double-click the icon for the NEtO application:
The NEtO Main Screen opens:

418
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Discovery of local NE by Network Element Overview (NEtO)


A simple two-way hand shake discovery protocol is implemented between NEtO application and local
connected NEs. Local connected Network Element (NE) means NE connected to NEtO using Local
Ethernet Telecommunications Management Network (TMN) port through a point-to-point Ethernet cable
or Ethernet network. In any case the NE and NEtO belong to the same IP subnet.
The discovery protocol made the following information available to NEtO regarding the local connected NE:
z Local IP Address
z NE Type
z NE Version
z NE Site Name

Selecting the NE, NEtO can automatically start the supervision without the need to provision the Local IP
address manually.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 8

1 Network Element Overview (NEtO)

1.2 NEtO Main Screen

Network Element
Information

419
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

The Main Screen is the starting point of the craft terminal application.
Only one NE can be managed in a NEtO session.
When you are connected to an NE, you get an Alarm overview.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 9

1.2 NEtO Main Screen

1.2.1 Site Database and Viewing Options

Minimize main view

Create new list of


favorite NEs

Maximize main view

Open list of current


favorite NEs

Open file containing list of


favorite NEs. Select file to use.
4 1 10
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Site Database
You can manage and organize a list of available NEs in a table on a server or a local PC.
All data related to all NEs added to the list is saved in a custom format called .NETO.
Your can have your own NEs lists repository, containing all .NETO files that you produced with NEs
information inside.
There is no default location for the database. You can save these anywhere, but be sure you remember
where you put it.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 10

1.2 NEtO Main Screen

1.2.2 NEtO Main Screen - Alarm Supervision

Green - ongoing supervision


Red - NE link not working
Gray - supervision not active

Default Alarm colors

(Also appears in System Tray)

Major alarm
Minor alarm
Warning alarm
Indeterminate
No Active alarms
Displays Summary of all
Active Alarms for this NE

Icon in system tray displays


highest alarm level in NE
4 1 11
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Icon in System Tray (highest alarm level in NE)


z

Gray: Supervision is not active

Red: Highest alarm is Critical

Orange: Highest alarm is Major

Yellow: Highest alarm is Minor

Cyan: Highest alarm is Warning

Blue: Highest alarm is Indeterminate

Green: No Active Alarms

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 11

Blank page
Switch to notes view!

4 1 12

This page intentionally left blank

NE Operation Operator GUI Interface


9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 12

2 Connect to NE - Direct Method

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration,


3EM23954AHAA, DLP-100 for more details
4 1 13
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 13

2 Connect to NE - Direct Method

2.1 Connect to NE - Direct Method


At the initial screen, select the NE you want to connect to:

Enter the IP Address of the NE

2 Click OK to select the IP address

4 1 14
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

You can manage only one Network Element (NE) in a NEtO session.
To connect to a NE, enter the NE IP Address or Domain Name System (DNS) name in the address box.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 14

2 Connect to NE - Direct Method

2.1 Connect to NE - Direct Method [cont.]

Alarm summary for selected NE


3 Click Show to connect to the NE

4 1 15
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 15

2 Connect to NE - Direct Method

2.1 Connect to NE - Direct Method [cont.]

4 Enter username
5 Enter login password

6 Click Login
4 1 16
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Login
Type your username - must not be more than 20 characters.
Type your password - must not be less than eight (8) or more than 20 characters and must be composed
of ASCII characters set (UPPER/lower case, numeric and special characters).

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 16

2 Connect to NE - Direct Method

2.2 NE Main View

4 1 17
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

The Main View Area manages all domains from which the operator can start. It is organized with tabbed
window. Each window is selectable (placing it on top of the others) with the tab shown on the top.
Tabs
z Each tab represents a set of functions:
z
Equipment (manage the equipment configuration)
z
Protection Schemes (manage the protection schemes in 1+1 configuration only)
z
Synchronization (manage the synchronization)
z
Connections (manage the cross-connections)
z Each tab window consists of three areas:
z
Resource-Tree Area: displays all the available resources of the NE.
z
Resource-List Area: may be represented by: Tabular View or Graphical View.
z
Tabular View: displays a tabular representation of the selected resource. As default, no tabular
element is shown.
z
Graphical View: displays a graphical representation of the selected resource. As default, no
graphical element is shown.
z
Resource-Detail Area: displays detailed information of a selected item in the Resource List area. As
a default, no entry view is displayed as a consequence of the default behavior of the Resource List
area.
z
Navigation from main view to multiple main views (related to the equipment components) can be
done by double-clicking the appropriate card image

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 17

Blank page
Switch to notes view!

4 1 18

This page intentionally left blank

NE Operation Operator GUI Interface


9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 18

3 Connect to NE - Database Method

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration,


3EM23954AHAA, DLP-127 for more details
4 1 19
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 19

3 Connect to NE - Database Method

3.1 Create Favorite NEs Database

Click new file icon to


1 create new favorite
NEs database file

4 1 20
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

Click Get Current to


copy NE info from IP
Address field and adds
it to the database

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

You can create a list of addresses for your favorite 9500 MPR locations.
Select icon to create a new list of favorite Network Elements (NE).
Select Get Current.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 20

3 Connect to NE - Database Method

3.1 Create Favorite NEs Database [cont.]

Enter database
file name

3 Click Save

5 Click Save

6 Click OK

4 1 21
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

NE selections can be stored in a database with the extension .neto.


The file can be located anywhere on your local machine, or on a network server.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 21

3 Connect to NE - Database Method

3.2 Connect to NE - Database Method


1

Click icon to open


a saved database

Enter database
file name

3 Click Open
4 1 22
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 22

3 Connect to NE - Database Method

3.2 Connect to NE - Database Method [cont.]

Adds new line for


direct entry of NE
information

Closes database
window

Copies NE info
from selected line
of table into IP
Address field

Deletes selected NE
info from database

4 1 23
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Get Current button is used to read information from main NEtO view. This operation will always add a
new line in NE list table with all information related to currently supervised NE. This happens even
though a NE with corresponding IP address is still present in the list.
Set Current button, filling main NEtO view IP address with datum from selected NE. The operator must
previously select a valid line in NEs table and then click on Set Current button so filling NEtO main
window data. This operation will automatically close the NE list window but does not start supervision on
set NE.
New button, adding a new NE from scratch. This allows the operator to fill the IP Address field only
with its needed NE.
Remove button, removes a selected NE.
Save button, saves table list in a specified file.
To close this window click on Close button.
All data are saved in a custom XML format called neto and this structured file will contain all data shown
in above figure related to NEs added to the list.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 23

3 Connect to NE - Database Method

3.2 Connect to NE - Database Method [cont.]

4 Select desired NE

5 Click Set Current

4 1 24
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Once you build and open the file with the database, you may select the NE to open by clicking Set
Current.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 24

3 Connect to NE - Database Method

3.2 Connect to NE - Database Method [cont.]


Selected NE IP
address

4 1 25
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

Click OK to select
IP address

Click Show to
connect to the NE

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 25

3 Connect to NE - Database Method

3.2 Connect to NE - Database Method [cont.]

8 Enter username
9 Enter login password

10 Click Login
4 1 26
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Login
Type your username - must not be more than 20 characters.
Type your password - must not be less than eight (8) or more than 20 characters and must be composed
of ASCII characters set (UPPER/lower case, numeric and special characters).

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 26

3 Connect to NE - Database Method

3.3 NE Main View

4 1 27
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 27

Blank page
Switch to notes view!

4 1 28

This page intentionally left blank

NE Operation Operator GUI Interface


9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 28

4 Main View

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration,


3EM23954AHAA, WebEML Craft Terminal Reference
Guide for more details
4 1 29
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 29

4 Main View

4.1 NE Main View

Resource
List Area

Resource
Tree Area

Resource Detail Area

4 1 30
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Resource-Tree Area: displays all the available resources of the NE.


z Displays all the available resources of the Radio NE in a tree structure.
z Each tree node consists of two symbols. The first symbol indicates the state of the structure, for

example, if the symbol has a "+" the tree can be expanded to a lower level. The tree structure can be
collapsed if the symbol is a "-". Finally, if there is no symbol, the node represents a leaf. The second
symbol is the graphical representation of the resource.

z The user must select the resource by clicking with the mouse to carry out an action that depends on the

type of click and the Resource Detail Area related to the selected element that is displayed. Each
resource listed may be selected by using the mouse with a single or double mouse click.

Resource-List Area: may be represented by: Tabular View or Graphical View.


z Tabular View: displays a tabular representation of the selected resource.
z Graphical View: displays a graphical representation of the selected resource.

Resource-Detail Area: displays detailed information of a selected item in the Resource List area.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 30

4 Main View

4.2 NE Main View - Tool Bars

Main Tool Bar

4 1 31
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

The Main View tool bars and icons:


Main Menu Bar:
z Pull-down Menus for management of radio functions.

Main Tool Bar Icons:


z This area contains a selection of handy quick-access buttons for common features.
z

Left arrow - previous screen

Zoom

Right arrow - next screen

Summary Block Diagram view

Current Configuration View

Cross-Connections View

Segregated Ports View

Ethernet Ring Configuration View

LAG Configuration View

QoS Configuration View

XPIC Configuration

Auxiliary Cross-Connections

VLAN Configuration

Wireless Transmission Performance Monitoring (WTPM) Tool


Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 31

Main Menu Bar

4 Main View

4.3 NE Main View - Severity Alarm Synthesis Area

Severity Alarm
Synthesis Area

Severity Alarm
Synthesis Area
with no alarms
reported

4 1 32
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Severity Alarm Synthesis Area


Severity of the different alarms in the NE as well as the number of current alarms.
z Each alarm severity is represented by an alarm icon situated in the top left hand corner of the view.
z These alarm icons are constantly represented on the different Equipment views (NE view, Module view

or Port view) so that the operator is always aware of the alarms occurring in the system.

The shape and color of these icons indicate the number and type of alarms on the NE.
z An alarm icon with a circle and number inside it indicates that alarms of the number and the type

defined by the icon are occurring.

z An alarm icon with a rectangle inside it indicates that no alarms of the type defined by the icon are

occurring.

z An alarm icon grayed out indicates that incoming alarm notification have been inhibited.

Alarm colors
z Red: Critical alarm (C)
z Orange: Major alarm (M)
z Yellow: Minor alarm (m)
z Cyan: Warning alarm (W)
z White: Indeterminate (I) Not operative

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 32

4 Main View

4.4 NE Main View - Domain Alarm Synthesis Area

Domain Alarm
Synthesis Area

Domain Alarm
Synthesis Area
with no alarms
reported

Domain Alarm Synthesis Area


EXT - External Point (Housekeeping alarm).
EQP - Equipment alarm
TRS - Transmission alarm
4 1 33
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Alarm Functionality
The Craft Terminal provides an alarm functionality that informs the operator on the severity of the
different alarms in the NE as well as on the number of current alarms.
There are five different alarm severity levels. These different levels are associated with colors (green in
normal condition).
z Red: Critical alarm (C)
z Orange: Major alarm (M)
z Yellow: Minor alarm (m)
z Cyan: Warning alarm (W)
z White: Indeterminate (I) Not operative

The shape of the alarm icons in the alarm panel gives an indication of alarm occurrence.
z An alarm icon with a rectangle inside indicates that no alarms of the type defined by the icon are

occurring.

z An alarm icon with a circle inside it (and a number at the bottom of the icon) indicates that alarms of the

number and the type defined by the icon are occurring.

z An alarm icon grayed out indicates that a spontaneous incoming alarm notification has been inhibited.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 33

4 Main View

4.5 NE Main View - Alarm & State Panels


Status Control Area

Local Access: Granted


Operation State Enabled:
Communications Link Up
Supervision State: Supervised
OS: Not Connected
NTP Protocol Enabled: Both
Servers Reachable
Abnormal Conditions: False
4 1 34
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Status Control Area


LOCK: Local Access state: indicates whether the NE is managed by a craft terminal or by the OS.
z Green: Indicates that the terminal has the OS permission to manage the NE (granted).
z Cyan: Indicates that the terminal does not have the OS permission to manage the NE (denied).

COM: Operational state: indicates whether or not the communication with the OS is established.
z Green: SDH service link up
z Red: SDH service link down
SUP: Supervision state: indicates whether or not the NE is under OS supervision.
z Green: NE is under supervision.
z Orange: NE is not under supervision.

OS: OS isolation.
z Green: NE is not managed by the 1353SH.
z Cyan: NE is managed by the 1353SH.

NTP Server Status


z Orange: NTP function is disabled.
z Green: Loss of communication with Main and Standby servers.
z Cyan: NE is communicating with NTP Main or Standby servers.

AC: Indicates whether some abnormal conditions have been recognized. The operator can visualize them with the
Diagnosis-> Abnormal condition list menu.
z Green: Normal operating condition
z Cyan: Detection of an Abnormal operative condition

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 34

Notes page
LOCAL ACCESS STATE:
Switchstatus
to notes
Indicates operational
for the view!
terminal to manage the NE

Indicates that the Craft Terminal has the OS permission


to manage the NE (granted)
Indicates the Craft Terminal requested OS permission to
manage the NE (requested)
Indicates that the Craft Terminal does not have the OS
permission to manage the NE (denied)

COMMUNICATION:
Indicates the operational status of the
connection between the NE and the OS
(SDH service link)

Indicates the Enable operational state of the connection


between NE and the terminal (SDH service link up)

SUPERVISION:
Indicates whether the NE is under OS
supervision

Indicates the NE is under supervision

OPERATIONAL SYSTEM ISOLATION:


Indicates
operational status of the NE
4 1 35
to beNE Operation
managed
byInterface
the 1353SH
Operator GUI

Indicates the User State is unblocked

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

NETWORK TIME PROTOCOL


SERVER STATUS:
Indicates the operational status of the
Network Time Protocol

Indicates the Disable operational state of the connection


between NE and the terminal (SDH service link down)

Indicates the NE is not under supervision. Used in the OS

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Indicates the User State is blocked

NTP server disabled


NTP server enabled, loss of communication with both the
Main and Standby servers
NTP server enabled, NE is communicating with NTP Main
and/or Standby servers

ABNORMAL CONDITION:
Indicates the status of Abnormal
Conditions present on the NE

Normal operating condition


Detection of an Abnormal operative condition exist on the
NE

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 35

4 Main View

4.6 NE Main View - Main Menu Bar

4 1 36
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 36

4 Main View

4.7 NE Main View Tab Windows - Equipment Tab

4 1 37
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 37

4 Main View

4.7 NE Main View Tab Windows - Equipment Tab [cont.]


Icons on front of module:
MPT-HL icon

Active

ODU300 icon

Stand-by

MPT-XX icon

Cross-connected

4 1 38
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 38

4 Main View

4.8 NE Main View Tab Windows - Protection Schemes Tab

Manual= switches between main and spare


Lockout= forces to main (Channel 1)
Forced= forces to spare (Channel 0)

4 1 39
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Equipment Protection Switching


Equipment protection is used to provide protection to a service implemented on one or several equipment.
Equipment protection is performed by switching the equipment supporting the protected service when this
equipment fails to protection (or spare) equipment capable of supporting the same service.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 39

4 Main View

4.9 Protection Scheme Parameters - Restoration Criteria

4 1 40
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 40

4 Main View

4.10 NE Main View Tab Windows - Synchronization Tab

4 1 41
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Normal Operation
The master can be provisioned to get sync clock from:
z internal local oscillator (Free Run Local Oscillator)
z DS1 Port
z external clock (Sync-In Port) from customer provided equipment

The slave radios can be provisioned to receive the sync clock from one of two sources:
z clock recovered by the radio receiver (Radio Port)
z sync clock from another radio in the network (Sync-In Port)
z

Normally at a repeater, the sync clock is received over the RF path and recovered by the radio
receiver.
A typical slave terminal uses the clock from an adjacent radio.

Sync Switching
z A revertive switching feature is a provisioning option that restores the sync clock to the original source

when the alarm on the primary source is cleared.

z If revertive switching is not selected, the secondary sync source will continue to provide sync clock, and

if the secondary source fails, must be manually switched to the primary source.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 41

4 Main View

4.11 NE Main View Tab Windows - Connections Tab

Select Help to see


Connection tab fields

4 1 42
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 42

4 Main View

4.12 NE Main View Tab Windows - Connections Tab - Help

4 1 43
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 43

Blank page
Switch to notes view!

4 1 44

This page intentionally left blank

NE Operation Operator GUI Interface


9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 44

5 MPT-HL Transceiver Radio Channel

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration,


3EM23954AHAA, DLP-109 for more details
4 1 45
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 45

5 MPT-HL Transceiver Radio Channel

5.1 Equipment View - MPT-HL

4 1 46
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Provision MPT
Note: The MPT-HL is automatically enabled when the MSS EAS/P8ETH module is enabled.
Select the MSS MPT-HL Dir#-Ch# in the Resource Tree area.
z The selected name will be highlighted in blue.
z This selection should also highlight the MSS-8 MPT-HL icon in blue in the resource List Area.

Select the MSS MPT-HL icon and the RF Settings screen will display.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 46

5 MPT-HL Transceiver Radio Channel

5.2 Equipment View - MPT-HL - Settings

4 1 47
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Provision MPT-HL Direction and Channel


Select the MSS-8 MPT-HL Dir#-Ch# in the Resource Tree area. The selected name will be highlighted in
blue. This selection should also highlight the MSS-8 MPT-HL icon in blue in the resource List Area.
Single left click the blue MSS-8 MPT-HL icon and the Protection Settings screen will display.
Select the Protection Type.
Select Protect Port.
Click Apply.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 47

5 MPT-HL Transceiver Radio Channel

5.3 Equipment View - MPT-HL

Double-click MPT-HL

4 1 48
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 48

5 MPT-HL Transceiver Radio Channel

5.4 Equipment View - Settings Tab

Example
Channel
Bandwidth

4 1 49
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

Modulation

Radio Capacity
Ethernet

10 MHz

128 QAM

52.64 Mb/s

30 MHz

32 QAM

114.22 Mb/s

30 MHz

128 QAM

160.17 Mb/s

30 MHz

256 QAM

183.30 Mb/s

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Select the slot in the MSS-8 Radio module to provision in the Resource Tree area. The selected name will
be highlighted in yellow. This selection should also highlight the MSS-8 Radio module in blue on the
graphical representation in the Resource List Area.
Double-click the blue MSS-8 Radio Module and the Settings Tab will display for the slot selected.
From the Reference Channel Spacing drop-down menu, select desired channel spacing (10, 30, or 40
MHz).
From the Modulation drop-down menu, select modulation scheme (32, 128, or 256 QAM).
Select the Channel #1 shifter frequency, from the channel #1 Shifter (MHz) drop-down menu, select the
TX (Go) and RX (Return) Separation Frequency.
Enter the TX Frequency within the allowed range.
The Rx Freq (KHz) displays the Rx RF Frequency.
Note: The Channel #1 Rx Freq (KHz) field displays the Rx RF Frequency and is the result of the following
calculation: RX Frequency = TX Frequency - Shifter Frequency

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 49

5 MPT-HL Transceiver Radio Channel

5.5 Equipment View - Settings Tab (Presetting Mode)

XPIC configuration Radio Channel XPIC


configuration vertical or horizontal

4 1 50
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 50

5 MPT-HL Transceiver Radio Channel

5.5 Equipment View - Settings Tab (Presetting Mode) [cont.]

PPP RF If enabled, the PPPoE interface is active and the IP


address of the remote connected NE will appear in the
Remote Address field.

4 1 51
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

The Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE) interface is a communication interface based on the use
of an inframe RF proprietary 512 Kbit/s channel. Through the PPPoE interface the NE can exchange
management messages with a remote OS (or Craft Terminal) station.
In the Routing IP Protocol field, click on the used IP protocol and in case of OSPF protocol select the
associated OSPF area.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 51

5 MPT-HL Transceiver Radio Channel

5.6 Equipment View - Settings Tab

4 1 52
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

Enable ATPC
or
Set RPTC values

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC)


z If (automatic) ATPC is enabled the screen will replace (static) RTPC fields with ATPC fields.
z When Rx power is equal to low remote ATPC Rx Threshold the ATPC algorithm starts to operate.

ATPC must be off to perform Fade Margin tests.


The ATPC function automatically increases or decreases the transmit output power upon request from the
opposite terminal. The opposite terminal constantly monitors Receive Signal Level (RSL), receive signal
quality, and aggregate Bit Error Rate (BER) of the receive signal.
When ATPC is enabled, the transmit output will remain at it's lowest level until a fade occurs (or a receive
circuit alarm is detected). When the change in RSL is detected at the receive end, a command is sent to
the transmit end to increase power in 1 dB steps to it's highest level. After fade is over, the receive end
commands transmit power to decrease in 1 dB steps to the lowest level.
The ATPC range (high and low limits) is variable, determined by link distance, link location, and link
frequency. When ATPC Enabled is checked, the range values are shown in parenthesis (minimum maximum) following ATPC Range.
When ATPC is not enabled the transmit output will always operate at it's highest level.
Remote Transmit Power Control (RTPC) allowed transmitted power range.
Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 52

5 MPT-HL Transceiver Radio Channel

5.7 Equipment View - Settings Tab - Alarm Profile

2 Select Show details

1 Click alarm Profile

4 1 53
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 53

Blank page
Switch to notes view!

4 1 54

This page intentionally left blank

NE Operation Operator GUI Interface


9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 54

6 MOD300 Radio Channel

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration,


3EM23954AHAA, DLP-109 for more details
4 1 55
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 55

6 MOD300 Radio Channel

6.1 Equipment View - Radio Modem

Double-click a
MOD300 card

4 1 56
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 56

6 MOD300 Radio Channel

6.2 Radio Modem Settings Tab - Adaptive Modulation Mode


1

Select Adaptive Modulaiton

Select Channel 1 Shifter


Frequency

Set Tx frequency

Rx frequency automatically
populated when TX
frequency is set

2
5

Set Reference Channel


Spacing, Modulation, and
gain

Click Apply

4 1 57
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 57

6 MOD300 Radio Channel

6.3 Radio Modem Settings Tab - Presetting Mode


1

Select Presetting (default)

Select Channel 1 Shifter


Frequency

Set Tx frequency

Rx frequency automatically
populated when TX
frequency is set

2
5

Set Reference Channel


Spacing, Modulation, and
gain

Click Apply

4 1 58
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 58

6 MOD300 Radio Channel

6.4 Radio Modem Settings Tab - Presetting Mode with ATPC

Enable ATPC

Enter min and max Tx


power

Enter ATPC Rx Threshold

4 1 59
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

Click Apply

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 59

6 MOD300 Radio Channel

6.5 Radio Modem Measurements Tab

Set parameters for power


measurements

Click Start to show power


measurement graph

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration,


3EM23954AHAA, DLP-123 for more details
4 1 60
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 60

6 MOD300 Radio Channel

6.6 Radio Modem Power Measurements Graphic

4 1 61
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 61

Blank page
Switch to notes view!

4 1 62

This page intentionally left blank

NE Operation Operator GUI Interface


9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 62

7 MPT-HC Radio Channel

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration,


3EM23954AHAA, DLP-109 for more details
4 1 63
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 63

7 MPT-HC Radio Channel

7.1 Equipment View - Radio Modem

Select an MPT-HC

4 1 64
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 64

Double-click the MPT-HL

7 MPT-HC Radio Channel

7.2 Radio Modem Settings Tab - Adaptive Modulation Mode


1

Select Adaptive Modulation

Select Channel 1 Shifter


Frequency

Set Tx frequency

Rx frequency automatically
populated when TX
frequency is set

2
5

Set Reference Channel


Spacing, Modulation, and
gain

Click Apply

4 1 65
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 65

7 MPT-HC Radio Channel

7.3 Radio Modem Settings Tab - Presetting Mode

Enable ATPC

Enter min and max Tx


power

Enter ATPC Rx Threshold

4 1 66
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

Click Apply

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 66

7 MPT-HC Radio Channel

7.4 Radio Modem Settings Tab - Presetting Mode with ATPC

Enable ATPC

Enter min and max Tx


power

Enter ATPC Rx Threshold

4 1 67
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

Click Apply

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 67

7 MPT-HC Radio Channel

7.5 Radio Modem Measurements Tab

Set parameters for power


measurements

Click Start to show power


measurement graph

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration,


3EM23954AHAA, DLP-123 for more details
4 1 68
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 68

7 MPT-HC Radio Channel

7.6 Radio Modem Power Measurements Graphic

4 1 69
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 69

Blank page
Switch to notes view!

4 1 70

This page intentionally left blank

NE Operation Operator GUI Interface


9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 70

8 Configuration Menu

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration,


3EM23954AHAA, DLP-118 for more details
4 1 71
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 71

8 Configuration Menu

8.1 Configuration Menu

4 1 72
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Grayed out fields are not implemented in this version of the 9500 MPR.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 72

8 Configuration Menu

8.2 Configuration Menu - NE Time Configuration

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration,


3EM23954AHAA, DLP-119 for more details
4 1 73
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

The NE local time can be displayed and re-aligned to the OS time basis.
From the Configuration pull down menu, select the NE Time option.
The NE Time dialogue box displays the current NE time and the current OS time.
To re-align the NE time to the OS time, click on the Set NE Time With OS Time check box and click the
Apply pushbutton to validate. This only works if the Network Time Protocol (NTP) is disabled.
Click the Refresh button to the refresh of the screen.
NTP will display Enabled or Disabled and address information as set under Configuration >Network
Configuration > NTP Configuration.
The Time settings will be grayed if the NTP is Enabled.
z The Operating System Time is from your PC or laptop.
z Network Element time is from the CSM-E/Core-E.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 73

8 Configuration Menu

8.3 Network Configuration - Local Configuration


Select Configuration>

1 Network Configuration>

Local Configuration

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration,


3EM23954AHAA, DLP-118 for more details
4 1 74
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

To get access the Network Configuration option select the Configuration pull down menu.
Local Configuration: defines the local virtual NE address

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 74

8 Configuration Menu

8.3 Network Configuration - Local Configuration [cont.]


The Local Configuration allows you to configure the local IP address of the
NE
The local IP address is the IP address associated to a virtual interface and
to the other interfaces which use the PPP protocol (the TMN-RF
channels)
Default IP address: 10.0.1.2 (new card)
Default mask: 255.255.255.255

4 1 75
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

The dialogue box opens to configure the local IP address of the NE.
This local IP address is the IP address associated to a virtual interface and to the other interfaces which
use the PPP protocol (the TMN-RF channels).
Default IP address: 10.0.1.2
Default mask: 255.255.255.255
z Apply button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the dialogue box and

closes it; the dialogue is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed.

z Close button closes the dialogue.


z Help button provides some useful information about the dialogue

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 75

8 Configuration Menu

8.4 Network Configuration - NTP Configuration


Select Configuration>
1 Network Configuration>
NTP Configuration

4 1 76
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

The Network Time Protocol (NTP) is a protocol for synchronizing the clocks over packet-switched, variablelatency data networks.
NTP Configuration: defines the Network Time Protocol

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 76

8 Configuration Menu

8.5 Network Configuration - IP Static Routing Configuration

4 1 77
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

Select Configuration>
Network Configuration>
IP Configuration>
IP Static Routing Configuration

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Grayed out fields are not implemented in this version of the 9500 MPR.
The Network Configuration is used to perform the following operations:
z Local Configuration: defines the local virtual NE address
z NTP Configuration
z Ethernet Configuration
z IP Configuration:
z

IP static routing configuration: defines the Host/Network destination address for IP static routing

OSPF Area configuration: defines the Open Shortest Path First address

z IP Point-To-Point Configuration: defines the IP address of the interfaces which use the PPP protocol
z Routing information: shows a summary of the information relevant to the routing which has been

configured.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 77

8 Configuration Menu

8.5 Network Configuration - IP Static Routing Configuration [cont.]

Select Host and enter IP Address, or

Network and enter IP Mask

Select Gateway IP Address and


enter Gateway IP Address, or
Point to Point Interface Index
and enter Interface Type

Click Close

Click Create

4 1 78
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Static Routing
Usually used at radio WAN border routers to specify a default gateway to:
z use for reaching external networks when the external network does not use a supported dynamic

routing protocol.

z control the exchange of dynamic route information between the radio WAN and the external network.

Static routing only supports provisioning a single route to a given destination at any radio. Route metrics
and redundant routes are not supported. This limits the useful WAN topologies to linear and tree
configurations when using Static Routing.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 78

8 Configuration Menu

8.6 Network Configuration - OSPF Area Configuration


Select Configuration>
Network Configuration>
1
IP Configuration>
OSFP Area Configuration

4 1 79
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Open Shortest Path First (OSPF)


The preferred method for routing within the radio WANs.
Uses a simplified OSPF implementation.
Configuration requires only an Area ID and Mask.
Supports redundant WAN paths, allowing linear, tree, ring, mesh and other WAN topologies. If redundant
paths are available, OSPF can reconfigure routes to work around a failed link.
Dynamically assigns a routing metric to redundant paths based on route cost, where the route cost is
determined by the speed of the interface used and the hop count to a destination.
Supports a maximum of 250 routes within a single OSPF area.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 79

8 Configuration Menu

8.6 Network Configuration - OSPF Area Configuration [cont.]

Click Apply

4 1 80
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

Select (check) new

Enter OSFP Area Address

Select OSFP Area Stub Flag

Click Create

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 80

Click Close

8 Configuration Menu

8.7 Network Configuration - Routing Information


Select Configuration>

1 Network Configuration>

Routing Information

This screen is a read-only screen and


displays the routing parameters
currently on the NE

4 1 81
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

The pushbutton Refresh allows to refresh the information shown in the screen.
The Close button closes the dialogue without changing of the data.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 81

8 Configuration Menu

8.8 Alarm Severities

4 1 82
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 82

8 Configuration Menu

8.8 Alarm Severities [cont.]


Note:

Screen is read only

4 1 83
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 83

8 Configuration Menu

8.9 Configuration Menu - System Settings

Select Configuration>
System Settings

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration,


3EM23954AHAA, DLP-117 for more details
4 1 84
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 84

8 Configuration Menu

8.9 Configuration Menu - System Settings [cont.]


This window defines the system configuration, providing the settings of
some parameters for the NE setup.
Select DHCP Server and
2

click Apply

Select Ethernet LOS


Criteria and click Apply
Select Static Lag Criteria

and click Apply

Enter System Priority Parameter


(0-65535) and click Apply
6

Select Event and Alarm


Log and click Apply

Enter NEC MAC Bridge


Address
8

4 1 85
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 85

Click Close

8 Configuration Menu

8.10 DiffServ - Class of Service


Priority

Flow

8 (Highest Priority)

TDM2TDM

TDM2ETH and TMN

ETH2ETH

Ethernet
Network Control and Voice
VoIP, Video conferencing, Audio conferencing

Ethernet
Video
Ethernet
Broadcast (Audio/Video)

3 Controlled Load

Ethernet
Web Browsing, Chat, Games

2 Best Effort
1 (Lowest Priority) Background

4 1 86
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

Ethernet
E-mail, database download

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

The Quality of Service feature of the Ethernet switch provides eight internal queues for each port to
support eight different class of service (COS).
For each egress port according to the method of QoS classification configured in the switch, the packets
are assigned to specific queue.
The higher priority queue is reserved for TDM2TDM flows; the queue 7 is reserved for TDM2ETH flows
while the queue 6 for TMN flows.
The remaining five queues are shared by all generic Ethernet flows according the default and fixed
classification mechanism configured by CT/NMS.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 86

8 Configuration Menu

8.11 Configuration Menu - Cross-Connections

4 1 87
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

Select Configuration>
Cross Connections

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Use the menu or the icon to setup cross-connections.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 87

8 Configuration Menu

8.11 Configuration Menu - Cross-Connections [cont.]

Port Colors:
Ethernet Ports

White

Can accept X-Connect No Active XC

Can accept X-Connect At least 1 Active XC


Cannot accept X--Connect (All cross-connects
are configured, or not configured)
4 1 88
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

Green Blue

X
X

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

The Main view is a graphical representation of cross-connectable slots. Slots (represented by connectors)
are arranged according to the equipment configuration:
z There are a maximum of 4 Ethernet ports placed on the bottom, ordered from 1 to 4 (from left to right).
z There are a maximum of 8 (PDH/Radio) slots (placed as in the CSM-E/Core-E sub-rack)

Note: We will get into more detail later in this course.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 88

8 Configuration Menu

8.12 Configuration Menu - Ring Configuration

Select Configuration>
Ring Configuration

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration,


3EM23954AHAA, DLP-141 and 142 for more details
4 1 89
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) switching is a protection mechanism for Ethernet ring topologies.
An ERP topology is a collection of Ethernet Ring Nodes forming a closed physical loop. A minimum of two
and maximum of sixteen Ethernet Ring Nodes are supported per ERP topology. One ERP topology is
supported per NE.
The fundamentals of ring protection switching architectures are loop avoidance and the utilization of
learning, forwarding, and address table management.
Up to two ERP instances are supported per ERP topology.
Ethernet Ring Links connect two adjacent Ethernet Ring Nodes participating in the same ERP Topology.
The Ethernet port used to construct the Ethernet Ring Link is called a Ring Port.
Use the menu or the icon to setup Ethernet ring parameters.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 89

8 Configuration Menu

8.12 Configuration Menu - Ring Configuration - Normal [cont.]

Under normal operating conditions


the RPL is blocked, and traffic flows
on all links in the ring except the
RPL.
4 1 90
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 90

8 Configuration Menu

8.12 Configuration Menu - Ring Configuration - Failure [cont.]

Under a ring link failure condition,


the RPL owner is responsible to
unblock the RPL. The Ring Node
(or nodes) which perform local
detection of the signal fail condition,
put their Ring Ports in a blocking
state the set of VLANs assigned to the ERP Instance on the radio interface where
the failure has been detected.
4 1 91
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Under a ring link failure condition, the RPL owner is responsible to unblock the RPL. The Ring Node (or
nodes) which perform local detection of the signal fail condition, put their Ring Ports in a blocking state the
set of VLANs assigned to the ERP Instance on the radio interface where the failure has been detected.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 91

8 Configuration Menu

8.12 Configuration Menu - Ring Configuration [cont.]

Enter ERP topology


parameters

2 Click Create

4 1 92
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 92

8 Configuration Menu

8.13 Configuration Menu - Ethernet Ring Instance

3 Click Create

Enter ERP instance


parameters

5 Click Create

4 1 93
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 93

8 Configuration Menu

8.13 Configuration Menu - Ethernet Ring Instance [cont.]

6 Select ERP Instance

Select ERP Enabled

Enter Restore Time and


Guard Timer data

8 Click Apply
10 Click Apply

4 1 94
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 94

8 Configuration Menu

8.14 Configuration Menu - LAG Configuration

Select Configuration>
Lag configuration

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration,


3EM23954AHAA, DLP-140 for more details
4 1 95
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Ethernet and Radio LAG ports are provisioned using the Craft Terminal.
Ethernet and Radio ports must be configured prior to provisioning LAG ports.
Use the menu or the icon to setup Lag configuration.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 95

8 Configuration Menu

8.14 Configuration Menu - LAG Configuration [cont.]

1 Click Create

2 Enter LAG data

3 Click Create

4 1 96
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 96

8 Configuration Menu

8.14 Configuration Menu - LAG Configuration [cont.]

Select LAG

Select L2 or L3

If port type is L2 Radio,


5a select port type, port,
and click >

8 Click Apply
4 1 97
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 97

If LAG type is radio,


enable or disable PPP RF

If LAG type is L2
5b Ethernet, select
priority

8 Configuration Menu

8.15 Configuration Menu - QoS Configuration

Select Configuration>
QoS configuration

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration,


3EM23954AHAA, DLP-147 for more details
4 1 98
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Use the menu or the icon to setup QoS configuration.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 98

8.15 Configuration Menu - QoS Configuration

8.15.1 Queue Scheduling


1

Select Scheduler
Classification tab

Select algorithm mode

3
4 Click Apply

Click Yes in the Apply Data to NE window

4 1 99
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 99

For DWRR mode, select


queue weight

8.15 Configuration Menu - QoS Configuration

8.15.2 Queue Size

Select Queue Size


Configuration tab

Double-click cell and enter


data
Modified queue size values
shown in yellow

3 Click Apply

Click Yes in the Apply Data to NE window

4 1 100
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 100

8.15 Configuration Menu - QoS Configuration

8.15.3 Classification

Select QoS Classification


tab

Select classification criteria

3 Click Apply

Click Yes in the Apply Data to NE window

4 1 101
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 101

8.15 Configuration Menu - QoS Configuration

8.15.4 802.1p

Select QoS Classification


tab

Select PCP to Forwarding


Class values
Modified forwarding class
values shown in yellow

3 Click Apply

Click Yes in the Apply Data to NE window

4 1 102
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 102

8.15 Configuration Menu - QoS Configuration

8.15.5 DiffServ

Select QoS Classification


tab

Select DiffServ to
Forwarding Class
values
Modified forwarding class
values shown in yellow

3 Click Apply

Click Yes in the Apply Data to NE window

4 1 103
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 103

8 Configuration Menu

8.16 Configuration Menu - XPIC Configuration


The XPIC function is two links operating on the same radio channel, one
using horizontal polarization, and the other using vertical

Select Configuration>
XPIC Configuration

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration,


3EM23954AHAA, DLP-109 for more details
4 1 104
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 104

8 Configuration Menu

8.16 Configuration Menu - XPIC Configuration [cont.]

Select Horizontal port and draw line to Vertical port

4 1 105
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 105

8 Configuration Menu

8.16 Configuration Menu - XPIC Configuration [cont.]

3 Click OK

4 Click Apply
5 Click Close

4 1 106
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 106

8 Configuration Menu

8.16 Configuration Menu - XPIC Configuration [cont.]


MPT Main View Setting tab display

4 1 107
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

Verify the correct radio channel is


shown for Associated Interface

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Select the Vertical channel and verify the correct channel is shown for Associated Interface Horizontal
radio channel.
Select the Horizontal channel and verify the correct channel is shown for Associated Interface Vertical
radio channel.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 107

8 Configuration Menu

8.17 Configuration Menu - VLAN Configuration


VLAN configuration determines Ethernet traffic management, 802.1D
(default), or 802.1Q
1

4 1 108
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

Select Configuration>
VLAN Configuration

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 108

8 Configuration Menu

8.18 Configuration Menu - Profiles Management


1

Change users own password


4 1 109
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

Select Configuration>
Profiles Management

Password change by admin

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

The operator can perform the following actions:


Create a new user by clicking on the Create button
z On the Profiles Management screen, click on Create button. Create User screen is displayed.
z On the Create User screen, enter Admin Password.
z On the Create User screen, enter User Name. User Name can be up to 20 characters and is case

sensitive.

z On the Create User screen, select Profile from list of four profiles to match users job description.
z On the Create User screen, enter Users Password. Password can be up to 20 characters and is case

sensitive.

z Enter users password again to confirm password.


z On the Create User screen, click Apply button. JUSM performs a syntax check of each field. If no error

messages are displayed, Create User screen closes and new users name and profile is displayed on
Profiles Management screen.

After the selection of a user in the table, it's possible to:


z Delete an existing user (the Admin user cannot be deleted) by clicking on the Delete button.
z Change PW (by Administrator) by clicking on the Change PW button.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 109

8 Configuration Menu

8.19 Configuration Menu - Ethernet Features Shell


z The LAG can be created by CLI commands launched with the WebEML

from the menu Configuration > Ethernet Features Shell


1

4 1 110
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

Select Configuration>
Ethernet Features Shell

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 110

8 Configuration Menu

8.20 Current Configuration View

4 1 111
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

When configuration is complete print the Current Configuration View for your records.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 111

Blank page
Switch to notes view!

4 1 112

This page intentionally left blank

NE Operation Operator GUI Interface


9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 112

9 Supervision Menu

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration,


3EM23954AG DLP-136 for more details
4 1 113
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 113

9 Supervision Menu

9.1 Supervision Menu

4 1 114
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 114

9 Supervision Menu

9.2 Supervision Menu - Access State

Click to switch NE management


via the network

Click to switch NE management


via the Craft Terminal

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration,


3EM23954AHAA, DLP-136 for more details
4 1 115
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

The NE can be managed by the OS or by the Craft Terminal. To control the choice of the OS or the CT, a
Local Access Control (LAC) is available.
z If the LAC is access denied, it means that the OS manages the NE and the CT is not allowed to modify
the NE configuration (it can only read). In the view, the icon with a key symbol has a circular shape.
z If the LAC is granted, it means that the CT is allowed to manage the NE. In the view, the icon with a
key symbol has a rectangular shape.
z If the LAC is requested, it means that the CT has requested a permission from the OS and is waiting
for a replay.
z
However, the OS does continue to provide a certain number of services. These services include:
z
Alarm reception and processing
z
Performance processing
z
Switching back to the OS access state
Select the Supervision pull down menu. Then select the Requested option from the Access State cascading
menu.
If the OS does not answer in a predefined time, it is assumed that the NE is in the Craft access state and
can be managed by a Craft Terminal.
z The key symbol icon on the management states of the NE view indicates whether the NE is managed by
a craft terminal or by the OS.
z Local Craft Terminal access is denied on recovery phase after a loss of communication of the NE. When
the communication with the NE is lost, the OS automatically recovers the communication and forces the
state existing before the loss of communication (therefore, Craft Terminal access can be denied or
granted).

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 115

9 Supervision Menu

9.3 Supervision Menu - Restart NE


The Restart NE operation is a software reset and can be executed in
normal traffic conditions.

4 1 116
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

Select Supervision>
Restart NE

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

WARNING: After the activation of the Restart NE Command (or after the pressing of the HW reset
push-button) the supervision of the local NE and the remote NEs is lost.
This operation deletes all Current Data and all History Data. All PM data will be lost.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 116

9 Supervision Menu

9.4 Supervision Menu - Restart MPT


z The Restart MPT operation is a software reset and can be executed in

normal traffic conditions

Select MPT to restart

Click Restart

4 1 117
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 117

Select Supervision>
Restart MPT

9 Supervision Menu

9.5 Supervision Menu - MIB Management


z The MIB Management operation is used to backup and restore system

files, remove files, and activate the system

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration,


3EM23954AHAA, DLP-131 for more details
4 1 118
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 118

9 Supervision Menu

9.6 MIB Management - Backup

Select Supervision>
MIB Management>
Backup

2 Enter backup file name

Click Save

4 1 119
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

The following parameters are not saved during MIB Management Database Backup, and are not affected
during the restore operation:
z Loopbacks
z Manual protection switches
z TMN In-band Ethernet Port Configuration

It is recommended that these parameters be saved by running a Current Configuration View report, so
they may be reprovisioned in the event that the system needs to be restored from scratch.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 119

9 Supervision Menu

9.7 MIB Management - Restore/Activate


Restores/activates saved NE configuration parameters to the
CSM-E/Core-E
MIB database restore should be performed for catastrophic recovery ONLY
Select Supervision>
1 MIB Management>
Restore/Activate

2 Select file from list

Click Open

4 1 120
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 120

9 Supervision Menu

9.8 MIB Management - Remove file


Remove a file from the database
Select Supervision>
1 MIB Management>
Remove Filr

2 Select file from list

Click Open

4 1 121
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 121

9 Supervision Menu

9.9 Supervision Menu - SW License

Click to see Software


License information

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration,


3EM23954AHAA, DLP-120 for more details
4 1 122
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 122

9 Supervision Menu

9.10 Supervision Menu - SW License Window


SW License String: the
Serial Number of the flash
card

SW License Code: the type


of the license written in
the flash card

SW License Key: the


license

4 1 123
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Flash Card
The flash card consists of:
z License Key
z MAC Address
z SW Load

The Refresh button activates a new reading of the read-only fields.


SW License Key
A license key is a functional management tool that allows the customer to chose between predefined sets
of features for the 9500 MPR and select only the license keys that have desired features.
Additional license keys can be added, adding features, as requirements change, using the license upgrade
procedure. After additional license keys are added, select Apply.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 123

Blank page
Switch to notes view!

4 1 124

This page intentionally left blank

NE Operation Operator GUI Interface


9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 124

10 Software Download Menu

4 1 125
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 125

10 Software Download Menu

10.1 SW Download Menu

4 1 126
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 126

10 Software Download Menu

10.2 SW Download Menu - Server Access Configuration

4 1 127
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

FTP Login fields:


z User Id and Password fields are the login information to access the FTP server
z Address field is the IP address of the FTP server
z Port field is the port to be used
z Root Dir field is the FTP server directory name from which the software can be downloaded

FTP Login buttons:


z Set Default automatically fills server access values with the default configuration
z

The CT is the default FTP server with the following parameters:


z

User Id: anonymous

Password: -

Address: local host IP address

Port: 21

Root Dir: /

System defaults can be changed by entering different values in the fields

z OK saves current values as system defaults

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 127

10 Software Download Menu

10.3 SW Download Menu - Init SW Download


Download software to the NE to upgrade the NE software version

FTP Server Address is from the last overhead


regarding Server Access Configuration

4 1 128
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 128

10 Software Download Menu

10.4 SW Download Menu - SW Status


z Display and activate software version loaded on the NE

Banks 1 and 2

4 1 129
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

The following information is displayed:


z Name - software name
z Version - software version
z Operational Status:
z

Enabled - software downloaded with no errors

Disabled - errors

z Current status:
z

Committed - software currently in use

Stand by - software in standby

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 129

10 Software Download Menu

10.5 SW Download Menu - SW Status Detail

Click to View Software Unit


details

Select Software
Management Action

Click Apply Action

Note: Software Management Action area


is active for stand by bank only
4 1 130
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Selecting Forced Activation forces the bank to be activated to restart


Selecting Activation restarts the bank to be activated only if the content of the two banks differ

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 130

Exercise

Time allowed:

Lab Exercise 2
Operator GUI - NEtO Overview
Lab Exercise 3
Operator GUI - NE Main View
Lab Exercise 4
Operator GUI - NEtO Menus
Lab Exercise 5
MPT-HL and MOD300 Configuration
4 1 131
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 131

Blank page
Switch to notes view!

4 1 132

This page intentionally left blank

NE Operation Operator GUI Interface


9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 132

Module summary
NEtO application
Connect to a 9500 MPR-A either via a network connection
or directly to the NMS (Craft) terminal
9500 MPR-A Network Elements

Tool Bars
Alarm & State Panels
Equipment Tab
Protection Tab
Synchronization Tab
Connections Tab
MPT-HL Settings
Radio Modem Settings
Local Configuration
NTP Configuration

4 1 133
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

IP Configuration
IP Static Routing Configuration
OSPF Area Configuration
System Settings
Cross-Connections
SW License
Server Access Configuration
Init SW Download
SW Status

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 133

End of module
Operator GUI Interface

4 1 134
NE Operation Operator GUI Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 1 Page 134

Do not delete this graphic elements in here:

Section 4
NE Operation
Module 2
Cross Connections
TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio)


Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)
TWT42013 Edition 1.1

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent @@YEAR

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 1

Blank page

Document History
422
NE Operation Cross Connections

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

R3.03 (ANSI)
Edition9500 MPR (Microwave
DatePacket Radio) Operations & Maintenance
Author

Remarks

01

2007-07-30

This page
is left blank intentionally
External
Consultant
First edition

01.10

2008-09-30

Fisher, Sheldon

Convert to ANSI version for NAR

01.20

2008-01-21

Fisher, Sheldon

Revisions after Pilot Class

01.31

2009-03-05

Fisher, Sheldon

Final Revisions

01.41

2009-06-15

Robinson, Ken

Revised for release 2.0

01.42

2009-08-12

Robinson, Ken

Revised after review

2.01

2010-07-30

Moehlenkamp, John

Revised to release 2.01

2.02

2010-11-30

Moehlenkamp, John

Revised to release 2.02

3.0

2011-02-28

Moehlenkamp, John

Revised to release 3.0

3.01

2011-06-29

Moehlenkamp, John

Revised to release 3.01

3.02

2011-11-15

Moehlenkamp, John

Updated format and revised to release 3.02

3.03

2012-02-07

Moehlenkamp, John

Revised to release 3.03

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 2

Module objectives
Upon completion of this module, you should be able to:

Configure DS1 ports


Configure DS3 ports
Describe cross-connections
TDM2TDM Mode
TDM2Eth Mode
TDM2TDMoEth Mode
Configure DS1 cross-connections
Configure DS3 cross-connections
Configure Ethernet ports
Describe port segregation
Configure Ethernet (P2P VLAN) cross-connections
Configure radio cross-connections

423
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 3

Module objectives [cont.]

424
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

This page is left blank intentionally

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 4

Table of Contents
Switch to notes view!
1 DS1 Ports
1.1 NE Main View - Connections Tab without Connections
1.2 NE Main View - Equipment Tab
1.3 NE - DS1 Ports Settings Tab
2 Cross-Connections
2.1 Cross-Connections
2.2 TDM2TDM Mode
2.3 TDM2Eth Mode
2.4 TDM2TDMoEth Mode
2.5 Cross-Connections
3 DS1 Cross-Connections
3.1 DS1 Cross-Connections
3.2 PDH (DS1) to MPT-HL Cross-Connections
4 DS3 Ports
4.1 NE Main View - Connections Tab without Connections
4.2 NE Main View - Equipment Tab
4.3 NE - DS3 Ports Settings Tab
5 DS3 Cross-Connections
5.1 DS3 Cross-Connections
5.2 PDH (DS3) to MPT-HL Cross-Connections
6 Ethernet Ports
6.1 NE Main View - Equipment Tab Ethernet Ports
4 26.2
5 CSM-E/Core-E Ethernet Ports
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 6.3
MPR (Microwave
Packet Radio) Operations
& Maintenance
R3.03 (ANSI)
EAS/P8ETH
Ethernet
Ports
6.4 CSM-E/Core-E TMN Interface
6.5 Inband TMN VLAN
6.6 Static Routing
7 Port Segregation
7.1 CSM-E/Core-E and EAS/P8ETH Ethernet Switches
7.2 Port Segregation
7.3 CSM-E/Core-E Ethernet Port Segregation
7.4 EAS/P8ETH Ethernet Port Segregation
7.5 Configuration
8 Ethernet Cross-Connections
8.1 Ethernet Cross-Connections
8.2 NE Main View - Connections Tab with Ethernet Cross-Connection
9 P2P VLAN Cross-Connections
9.1 P2P VLAN Cross-Connections
10 Radio Cross-Connections
10.1 Radio to Radio Cross-Connections
COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Page
7
8
9
10
15
16
18
19
20
22
25
26
30
33
34
35
36
41
42
46
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
57
58
59
60
61
63
65
66
69
71
72
75
76

Table of Contents [cont.]


Switch to notes view!

426
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Page

1 DS1 Ports

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration,


3EM23954AHAA, DLP-104 and DLP-106 for more
details
427
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 7

1 DS1 Ports

1.1 NE Main View - Connections Tab without Connections

Connections Panel will be empty


until cross-connects are configured

428
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Cross-connections are always required for TDM traffic.


Generic Ethernet traffic is handled automatically via MAC Address learning in the Ethernet switch.
Cross-connections can also be used with point-to-point VLAN Ethernet traffic to direct traffic based on
VLAN tag rather than MAC address.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 8

1 DS1 Ports

1.2 NE Main View - Equipment Tab

Double-click a DS1
card to set ports

429
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

All configuration instructions in training material are for training only. Always refer to latest customer
documentation for steps to configure a working system.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 9

1 DS1 Ports

1.3 NE - DS1 Ports Settings Tab

Table of DS1 port settings


32
DS1 ports

Settings Tab - settings for selected DS1 port

4 2 10
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Double-click the MSS/DS1 (P32E1DS1) module in the Resource List Area.


The Alarms and Settings screens will display.
Select Settings tab.
Select a DS1 port number, 01 to 32.
Select the Signal Mode drop-down menu and choose signal mode type, Disabled, Unframed or Framed.
Select the Service Profile drop-down menu and choose service profile type, TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH.
DS1 Port Service Profile provisioning must be the same at both ends of the link.
Select the appropriate Line Coding radio button, AMI or B8ZS.
Enter the Line Length (distance to cross-connect), 0 to 655.
Click Apply to save the DS1 port provisioning.
You may need to changed more values and click Apply again.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 10

1 DS1 Ports

1.3 NE - DS1 Ports Settings Tab [cont.]

1 Select port
to enable

2 Select framing

3 Distance (feet) to
cross-connect

Flow ID number
required to
transport DS1 data

5 Click Apply

4 2 11
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Flow ID number is unique for that DS1 port on both ends of the path and once assigned, cannot be
repeated throughout the network.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 11

1 DS1 Ports

1.3 NE - DS1 Ports Settings Tab [cont.]

Port is now active

4 2 12
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

In TDM2TDM mode, TDMs are collected, packetized, transmitted over the radio, switched in the node and
then de-packetized at the last node.
In TDM2Eth mode, TDMs are collected, packetized and made available over Ethernet at the last node.
TDM2Eth Terms
Signal Mode - Configures framing detector on P2E2DS3 module.
Both the near end and far end facility Signal Mode must be set the same.
Payload Size - Number of data bits without overhead in Mb/s. Both the near end and far end facility

must be set the same.

ECID (Emulation Identification) is a network unique 8-bit code identifier used along with V-LAN to

identify and switch individual DS1 lines through the CSM-E/Core-E.


Verify near end ECID Tx and far end ECID Rx are set the same.
Verify far end ECID Tx and near end ECID Rx are set the same.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 12

Exercise

Lab Exercise 6
Configure DS1 Ports

Time allowed:

4 2 13
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 13

Blank page
Switch to notes view!

4 2 14

This page intentionally left blank

NE Operation Cross Connections


9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 14

2 Cross-Connections

4 2 15
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 15

2 Cross-Connections

2.1 Cross-Connections
Cross connection is only required for TDM traffic. Generic Ethernet traffic is handled
automatically via MAC Address learning in the Ethernet switch. Cross connections
can also be used with point-to-point VLAN Ethernet traffic to direct traffic based
on a VLAN tag rather than MAC address
The cross connections screen is used to configure switching of packetized data.
Using this screen, the operator can switch:
PDH to Radio:
y PDH (DS1 port) to RADIO (MOD300 or EAS/P8ETH radio port)
y PDH (DS3 port) to RADIO (MOD300 or EAS/P8ETH radio port)

PDH to Ethernet:
y PDH (DS1 port) to ETH (CSM-E/Core-E or EAS/P8ETH Ethernet port)
y PDH (DS3 port) to ETH (CSM-E/Core-E or EAS/P8ETH Ethernet port)

Ethernet to Radio:
y ETH (CSM-E/Core-E Ethernet port) to RADIO (MOD300 or EAS/P8ETH radio port)
y ETH (EAS/P8ETH Ethernet port) to RADIO (MOD300 or EAS/P8ETH radio port)

Radio to Radio:
y RADIO (MOD300 radio port) to RADIO (MOD300 radio port)
y RADIO (EAS/P8ETH radio port) to RADIO (MOD300 or EAS/P8ETH radio port)
4 2 16
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 16

2 Cross-Connections

2.1 Cross-Connections [cont.]

4 2 17
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

The cross-connections between slots and between slot and Ethernet user ports are realized with a Layer-

2 Ethernet Switch inside the Core-E unit.

The decision made by the switch to forward the received packet is based on the destination MAC

address.

Each DS1can be cross connected independently.


DS1 can be cross connected to any of the following interfaces:
Radio interface
Ethernet interface
Each DS1(board #, port #) must be associated to an unique signal flow ID.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 17

2 Cross-Connections

2.2 TDM2TDM Mode

9500MPR

9500MPR

9500MPR

DS1/DS3

DS1/DS3

DS1/DS3

9500MPR

DS1/DS3

In TDM2TDM mode, the 9500 MPR-A operates like a TDM radio


DS1s and DS3s are collected, packetized, transmitted over the radio,
switched in the node and then de-packetized and dropped as DS1/DS3
traffic
4 2 18
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

TDM2TDM
The DS1 data stream is inserted into one Node and extracted in another Node.
The two Internal Working Functions (IWF) used to packetize the traffic for the Ethernet switch in the CSME/Core-E are internal in the radio.
Service profile provisioning is TDM2TDM for both Nodes.
Cross-connections are DS1 module (PDH) to radio module.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 18

2 Cross-Connections

2.3 TDM2Eth Mode

9500MPR

9500MPR

9500MPR

LAN/MAN
LAN/MAN

9500MPR

DS1/DS3

DS1/DS3

Ethernet

LAN/MAN
LAN/MAN

Ethernet

z In TDM2Eth mode, the 9500 MPR-A operates like a straight-through

Ethernet connection
z DS1s and DS3s are collected, packetized, transmitted over the radio,
switched in the node and then dropped as Ethernet traffic
4 2 19
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

TDM2Eth
Ethernet Signal Flow - The Ethernet is inserted into customer access ports on the CSM-E/Core-E
EAS/P8ETH in one Node and extracted from customer access ports on the CSM-E/Core-E EAS/P8ETH in
another Node.

Service profile provisioning is TDM2Eth for both Nodes.

Cross-connections are automatically made by the Ethernet switch.

DS1 Signal Flow - The DS1 port data stream is inserted into one Node and extracted in another Node.

Service profile provisioning is TDM2Eth for both Nodes.

Cross-connections are DS1 module port (PDH) to radio module.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 19

2 Cross-Connections

2.4 TDM2TDMoEth Mode


MPT-HL
May not be needed

CSM-E/Core-E

EAS/P8ETH
EAS/P8ETH
TDM
TDM
9500
(32xDS1)
(32xDS1
(32xDS1)

DS1

9500 MPR

Ethernet/IP/MPL
Ethernet/IP/MPL
SSNetwork
Network
n x Ethernet

MPR

Ethernet/IP/M
Ethernet/IP/M
PLS
PLSNetwork
Network

DS1
LAN/MAN
LAN/MAN

LAN/MAN
LAN/MAN

Eth
4 2 20
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

Eth
COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

TDMoEth
TDMoEth is a system that is used to transport TDM and Ethernet traffic through Ethernet.
TDMoEth provides:
Transparency of signaling protocols (CAS, PRI, SS7, )
Investment Protection migration to IP without compromising rich PBX features (evolutionary approach

with no fork-lift upgrades)

Channel aggregation and multiplexing that improves resiliency to packet loss


Maintains clock synchronization and Low Latency

There is not a way to directly provision the TDM2TDMoEth mode. TDM2TDMoEth is a way of using the
9500 MPR. Just provision the TDM2TDM to a Ethernet port.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 20

2 Cross-Connections

2.4 TDM2TDMoEth Mode [cont.]


Click on Cross-Connect icon

DS3
Dashed lines indicate
protection group

Ethernet
DS1

4 2 21
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 21

2 Cross-Connections

2.5 Cross-Connections

Slot Colors

Slot Types

White Enabled for cross-connection - not


currently cross-connected

Radio
PDH
Ethernet

Green Enabled for cross-connection currently cross-connected

Radio LAG

Blue

Disabled for cross-connection (ETH,


RADIO, and PDH) or fully crossconnected (RADIO and PDH)

Gray

Spare port of a protection pair

Eth LAG
Eth Ring

4 2 22
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Cross connection port icons


PDH: Identifies PDH/SDH Ports
ETH: Identifies ETH Ports
RADIO: Identifies Radio Ports
ETH LAG: Identifies Ethernet LAG Ports
RADIO LAG: Identifies Radio LAG Ports
Ring: Identifies Ethernet Ring Port

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 22

2 Cross-Connections

2.5 Cross-Connections [cont.]

Connection line colors


PDH-Radio
PDH-Eth
Radio-Radio
Radio-Eth

4 2 23
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 23

Black
Blue
Red
Green

Blank page
Switch to notes view!

4 2 24

This page intentionally left blank

NE Operation Cross Connections


9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 24

3 DS1 Cross-Connections

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration,


3EM23954AHAA, DLP-112 for more details
4 2 25
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 25

3 DS1 Cross-Connections

3.1 DS1 Cross-Connections

Flow ID pop-up dialog box


appears

1 Draw cross-connection

4 2 26
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 26

3 DS1 Cross-Connections

3.1 DS1 Cross-Connections [cont.]

3 Select Flow IDs

4 Click OK

4 2 27
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 27

3 DS1 Cross-Connections

3.1 DS1 Cross-Connections [cont.]

Colors of
connectors change
as appropriate

4 2 28
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 28

Click Apply to
complete the crossconnect

3 DS1 Cross-Connections

3.1 DS1 Cross-Connections [cont.]

6 Right-click
Slot 5/6 DS1

4 2 29
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 29

3 DS1 Cross-Connections

3.2 PDH (DS1) to MPT-HL Cross-Connections

Connections tab now


shows connection

4 2 30
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

For TDM2Eth connections in a protected state, the MSB of the MAC address must be 1.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 30

Exercise

Lab Exercise 7
DS1 Cross-Connections

Time allowed:

4 2 31
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 31

Blank page
Switch to notes view!

4 2 32

This page intentionally left blank

NE Operation Cross Connections


9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 32

4 DS3 Ports

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration,


3EM23954AHAA, DLP-104 and DLP-106 for more
details
4 2 33
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 33

4 DS3 Ports

4.1 NE Main View - Connections Tab without Connections

Connections Panel will be empty


until cross-connects are configured

4 2 34
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Cross-connections are always required for TDM traffic.


Generic Ethernet traffic is handled automatically via MAC Address learning in the Ethernet switch.
Cross-connections can also be used with point-to-point VLAN Ethernet traffic to direct traffic based on
VLAN tag rather than MAC address.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 34

4 DS3 Ports

4.2 NE Main View - Equipment Tab

Double-click a
DS3 card to set
ports

4 2 35
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

All configuration instructions in training material are for training only. Always refer to latest customer
documentation for steps to configure a working system.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 35

4 DS3 Ports

4.3 NE - DS3 Ports Settings Tab

Table of DS3 port settings


2
DS1 ports

Settings Tab - settings for selected DS3 port

4 2 36
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 36

4 DS3 Ports

4.3 NE - DS3 Ports Settings Tab [cont.]

2 Select Signal
Mode
1 Select port
to enable

4 Select device
profile

Distance (feet)
to cross-connect
and AIS signal

Flow ID number
required to
transport DS3 data

6 Click Apply

4 2 37
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Flow ID number is unique for that DS3 port on both ends of the path and once assigned, cannot be
repeated throughout the network.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 37

4 DS3 Ports

4.3 NE - DS3 Ports Settings Tab [cont.]

Port is now active

4 2 38
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

In TDM2TDM mode, TDMs are collected, packetized, transmitted over the radio, switched in the node and
then de-packetized at the last node.
In TDM2Eth mode, TDMs are collected, packetized and made available over Ethernet at the last node.
TDM2Eth Terms
Signal Mode - Configures framing detector on P2E2DS3 module.
Both the near end and far end facility Signal Mode must be set the same.
Payload Size - Number of data bits without overhead in Mb/s. Both the near end and far end facility

must be set the same.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 38

Exercise

Lab Exercise 8
Configure DS3 Ports

Time allowed:

4 2 39
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 39

Blank page
Switch to notes view!

4 2 40

This page intentionally left blank

NE Operation Cross Connections


9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 40

5 DS3 Cross-Connections

Refer to 9500 MPR Operations and Administration,


3EM23954AHAA, DLP-112 for more details
4 2 41
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 41

5 DS3 Cross-Connections

5.1 DS3 Cross-Connections

Flow ID pop-up dialog box


appears

1 Draw cross-connectionn

4 2 42
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 42

5 DS3 Cross-Connections

5.1 DS3 Cross-Connections [cont.]

3 Select Flow IDs

4 Click OK

4 2 43
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 43

5 DS3 Cross-Connections

5.1 DS3 Cross-Connections [cont.]

Colors of
connectors change
as appropriate

4 2 44
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 44

Click Apply to
complete the crossconnect

5 DS3 Cross-Connections

5.1 DS3 Cross-Connections [cont.]

4 2 45
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 45

Right-click
Slot 5/6 DS1

5 DS3 Cross-Connections

5.2 PDH (DS3) to MPT-HL Cross-Connections

Connections tab now


shows connection

4 2 46
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 46

Exercise

Lab Exercise 9
DS3 Cross-Connections

Time allowed:

4 2 47
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 47

Blank page
Switch to notes view!

4 2 48

This page intentionally left blank

NE Operation Cross Connections


9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 48

6 Ethernet Ports

Refer to 9500 MPR Operations and Administration,


3EM23954AHAA, DLP-104 and DLP-108 for more
details
4 2 49
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 49

6 Ethernet Ports

6.1 NE Main View - Equipment Tab Ethernet Ports

Double-click the CSM


or EAS card to set
Ethernet ports

4 2 50
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

The cross-connection between Slots, Ethernet user ports, and Equipment Controller are realized with a
standard Ethernet Switch.
The destination MAC address or the VLAN or both are used by the switch to decide towards which egress
port to send each received packet.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 50

6 Ethernet Ports

6.2 CSM-E/Core-E Ethernet Ports


Select Ethernet
Physical Interface tab

Select port
to enable
3

Select Settings tab

4 Select Enabled
and click Apply

Set parameters

6 Click Apply

4 2 51
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 51

6 Ethernet Ports

6.3 EAS/P8ETH Ethernet Ports


Select Ethernet
Physical Interface tab

Select port
to enable
3

Select Settings tab

4 Select Enabled
and click Apply

Set parameters

6 Click Apply

4 2 52
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 52

6 Ethernet Ports

6.4 CSM-E/Core-E TMN Interface

Select port
to enable
2

Select Settings tab

Set parameters

4 Click Apply

4 2 53
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Provision TMN Interface


The Telecommunications Management Network (TMN) is a protocol model defined by ITU-T for managing
open systems, such as 9500 MPR, in a communications network.
1. Select TMN Interface tab.
2. Select TMN Port in left frame.
3. Select Settings tab.
4. Select TMN Ethernet Enabled check box.
5. Enter the IP Address and IP Mask.
6. Select the IP Routing Protocol drop-down menu and choose Static Routing.

or
Select the IP Routing Protocol drop-down menu and choose OSPF.
7. Click Apply to store TMN Interface provisioning.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 53

6 Ethernet Ports

6.5 Inband TMN VLAN


Inband TMN VLAN port allows the user to manage an 9500 MPR-A NE
using a general Ethernet port from a central location (NOC).
Inband TMN messages reach the 9500 MPR-A over general user electrical
Ethernet port 3 and optical Ethernet port 5 on the CSM-E/Core-E card.
Either electrical Ethernet port 3 or optical Ethernet port 5 can be used
simultaneously for both general Ethernet traffic and TMN traffic.
Inband TMN provisioning applies to both electrical Ethernet port 3 and
optical Ethernet port 5.
TMN Inband TMN VLAN port interface and Port#4 TMN Ethernet interface
should not be connected to a network at the same time.
The Inband TMN Ethernet interface:

requires its own IP address and sub-network mask


uses the same MAC address as Port#4 TMN Ethernet interface
does not require Port#4 TMN Ethernet interface to be provisioned
requires a unique VLAN ID (2-4080)

An optional OSPF area can be assigned, and must be provisioned prior to


provisioning the Inband TMN Ethernet interface. Supports IP static
routing.
4 2 54
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

This is another method of monitoring alarms.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 54

6 Ethernet Ports

6.6 Static Routing


Usually used at radio WAN border routers to specify a default gateway to:

use for reaching external networks when the external network does not use a
supported dynamic routing protocol.
control the exchange of dynamic route information between the radio WAN
and the external network.

Static routing only supports provisioning a single route to a given


destination at any radio. Route metrics and redundant routes are not
supported. This limits the useful WAN topologies to linear and tree
configurations when using Static Routing.
Maximum of 25 static route entries per radio.

To minimize the number of static route entries required, the radio network
addressing plan should allow for maximum route aggregation.
Static routes directed out the PPP interfaces use the interface name as the
route destination; rf, rptr, or (front) ppp.

4 2 55
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 55

Exercise

Lab Exercise 10
Configure Ethernet Port

Time allowed:

4 2 56
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 56

7 Port Segregation

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration,


3EM23954AHAA, DLP-111 for more details
4 2 57
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 57

7 Port Segregation

7.1 CSM-E/Core-E and EAS/P8ETH Ethernet Switches


We may think of Ethernet switches as smart multi-port bridges
After the destination is found, frames are only forwarded to the correct out port
B

Ethernet/IP
Ethernet/IP
/MPLS
/MPLS
Network
Network

Ethernet Switch

Dallas
Dallasto
to
Atlanta
Atlanta
Traffic
Traffic

DS1

4 2 58
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

Atlanta

Ethernet/IP
Ethernet/IP
/MPLS
/MPLS
Network
Network

DS1

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Cross-connections are nailed-up connections. Cross-connections are not required for the Ethernet switch to
pass traffic. Even if your Cross-connection screen does not show any connections you may still have
traffic across your Ethernet switch.
Layer 2 Switching
An address table is built based on incoming MAC address.
If the address is not known the frames are sent to all ports.
If the address is in the table, frames are only sent to the correct port.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 58

7 Port Segregation

7.2 Port Segregation


1

4 2 59
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

Click Segregated
Ports icon

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 59

7 Port Segregation

7.3 CSM-E/Core-E Ethernet Port Segregation

2 Double-click
Port Slot 1

4 2 60
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

When provisioning multiple radio links on the same path use port segregation to avoid any Ethernet loops.
Double-click on the promiscuous port. Uncheck all ports to be segregated. Select OK then Apply.
This option sets the segregation state to exclude the port from exchanging frames with a given list of
ports.
In this way a segregated port can exchange frames only with a non-segregated port.
Port segregation is used to:
save bandwidth (prevent collisions and broadcasts)
save resources on the node and on the ports
improve the security and the privacy of the transmission

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 60

7 Port Segregation

7.4 EAS/P8ETH Ethernet Port Segregation

3 Double-click Port
Slot 3 Port 1

4 2 61
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 61

7 Port Segregation

7.4 EAS/P8ETH Ethernet Port Segregation [cont.]

Click on ports
4 that will be
segregated

5 Click OK

4 2 62
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 62

7 Port Segregation

7.5 Configuration

Orange dashed lines indicate


ports that are segregated from
each other

6 Click Apply

4 2 63
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

The switch ports in a private VLAN domain have special characteristics. One key characteristic is port
segregation within an isolated VLAN.
Isolated or segregated ports are typically used for those endpoints that only require access to a limited
number of outgoing interfaces.
An endpoint connected to an isolated port will only possess the ability to communicate with those

endpoints connected to promiscuous ports.

Endpoints connected to adjacent isolated ports cannot communicate with one another.

If you attempt to setup a cross-connection between ports that have been segregated, you will get a
warning that the port is segregated.
Press Alt-W. Notice the screens are different if any ports are segregated.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 63

Blank page
Switch to notes view!

4 2 64

This page intentionally left blank

NE Operation Cross Connections


9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 64

8 Ethernet Cross-Connections

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration,


3EM23954AHAA, DLP-112 for more details
4 2 65
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 65

8 Ethernet Cross-Connections

8.1 Ethernet Cross-Connections

2 Flow ID pop-up
dialog box appears

1 Draw crossconnection

4 2 66
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Remember Flow Id must be the same on both ends of the path and only used once in the network.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 66

8 Ethernet Cross-Connections

8.1 Ethernet Cross-Connections [cont.]

3 Insert Flow ID

4 Insert MAC Address

5 Click OK

4 2 67
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Ethernet Flow IDs


For multiple Flow IDs:
List each Flow ID separately, with a comma separator (56, 57, 60, 70)
List an inclusive range of Flow IDs (56-65, 70, 72)

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 67

8 Ethernet Cross-Connections

8.1 Ethernet Cross-Connections [cont.]

Color of connectors
changes as appropriate

4 2 68
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

Click Apply to
complete the crossconnect

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Ethernet to Radio Cross-Connections


Select Ethernet port and drag and draw line to Radio port. RADIO-ETH pop-up displays.
On the RADIO-ETH pop-up, enter Flow ID number in the Flow ID field.
Enter the destination MAC address where the DS1 will be terminated in the MAC Address field.
On the RADIO-ETH pop-up, click OK.
On the Cross-Connection screen, click Apply.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 68

8 Ethernet Cross-Connections

8.2 NE Main View - Connections Tab with Ethernet Cross-Connection

Connections tab now


shows connections

4 2 69
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 69

Blank page
Switch to notes view!

4 2 70

This page intentionally left blank

NE Operation Cross Connections


9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 70

9 P2P VLAN Cross-Connections

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration,


3EM23954AHAA, DLP-140 for more details
4 2 71
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 71

9 P2P VLAN Cross-Connections

9.1 P2P VLAN Cross-Connections


More than one cross-connection can be drawn if sufficient ports are
configured
Cross-connections describe path to use.
Segregation describes path not to use.

Each cross-connection must be identified with a separate flow ID


The Point to Point (P2P) VLAN cross-connect allows the user to direct
VLAN-tagged traffic between specified Ethernet and radio ports
P2P VLAN must have a MAC Address of 000000000000
Nailed up cross-connections use a physical MAC Address of the device
attached to the NE.

4 2 72
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Point to Point VLAN


The Point to Point (P2P) VLAN cross-connect feature allows the user to direct VLAN-tagged traffic between
specified Ethernet and radio ports. Rather than directing all traffic to and from the cross-connected
ports, the feature directs Ethernet traffic where the VLAN tag matches the cross-connect Flow ID. (Flow
ID matches VLAN ID.)
When making the connection for a P2P VLAN flow, the user should enter a MAC address of all 0's

(000000000000). P2P VLAN cross-connects will direct matching VLAN-tagged Ethernet traffic to the
cross-connected ports regardless of the destination MAC address in the Ethernet frames.

Ethernet traffic entering the cross-connected port with a VLAN tag matching the flow id will be directed

only to the port on the other end of the cross-connect. Traffic will not be flooded. This will also take
precedence over any MAC address learning for VLAN-tagged traffic that matches the flow id in the crossconnect.

Ethernet traffic entering the cross-connected port with no VLAN tag or VLAN tags that do not match the

flow id specified in the cross-connect will flood to all ports until MAC address learning takes place. The
P2P VLAN cross-connect will have no effect on this traffic.

VLAN tagged Ethernet traffic that enters a port will be dropped if the VLAN tag matches the flow id of a

cross-connect that is on a different port.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 72

9 P2P VLAN Cross-Connections

9.1 P2P VLAN Cross-Connections [cont.]

Draw new P2P VLAN


cross-connection

4 2 73
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

A virtual LAN (VLAN) is a single broadcast domain.


By default all ports on the Ethernet switch are in a single VLAN until they are divided into multiple VLANs.
Frames are not forwarded from one VLAN to another VLAN. To forward to a different VLAN a router is
required.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 73

9 P2P VLAN Cross-Connections

9.1 P2P VLAN Cross-Connections [cont.]

MAC Address must be


000000000000

4 2 74
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 74

10 Radio Cross-Connections

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration,


3EM23954AHAA, DLP-140 for more details
4 2 75
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 75

10 Radio Cross-Connections

10.1 Radio to Radio Cross-Connections

Draw line from radio


port to radio port

Enter Flow ID

Click OK

4 2 76
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

Click Apply

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Radio to Radio Cross-Connections


Select Radio port and drag and draw line to Radio port. RADIO-RADIO pop-up displays.
On the RADIO-RADIO pop-up, enter Flow ID number in the Flow Id field (flow ID must be the same
through the entire path).
On the RADIO-RADIO pop-up, click OK.
On the Cross-Connections screen, click Apply.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 76

Exercise

Lab Exercise 11
Ethernet Cross-Connections

Time allowed:

4 2 77
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 77

Blank page
Switch to notes view!

4 2 78

This page intentionally left blank

NE Operation Cross Connections


9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 78

Module summary
Configure DS1 ports
Describe cross-connections
Configure DS1 cross-connections
Configure DS3 ports
Configure DS3 cross-connections
Configure Ethernet ports
Describe port segregation
Configure Ethernet (P2P VLAN) cross-connections
Configure radio cross-connections

4 2 79
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 79

End of module
Cross Connections

4 2 80
NE Operation Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 2 Page 80

Do not delete this graphic elements in here:

Section 4
NE Operation
Module 3
Performance Monitoring
TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio)


Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)
TWT42013 Edition 1.1

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent @@YEAR

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 3 Page 1

Blank page

Document History
Edition

Date

432
NE Operation Performance Monitoring

Author

Remarks
COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

9500 MPR (Microwave


Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance
R3.03 (ANSI)
01.42
2009-08-04
Robinson,
Ken

First edition

2.01

2010-07-30

Moehlenkamp,
Revised to release 2.01
This
page is leftJohn
blank intentionally

2.02

2010-11-30

Moehlenkamp, John

Revised to release 2.02

3.0

2011-02-28

Moehlenkamp, John

Revised to release 3.0

3.01

2011-06-29

Moehlenkamp, John

Revised to release 3.01

3.02

2011-11-15

Moehlenkamp, John

Updated format and revised to release 3.02

3.03

2012-02-07

Moehlenkamp, John

Revised to release 3.03

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 3 Page 2

Module objectives
Upon completion of this module, you should be able to sse the menus and
tabs to observe the 9500 MPR-A Network Elements performance:

Power Measurements
Alarms
Event Log
Remote Inventory
Abnormal Condition List
Summary Block Diagram View
Current Configuration View
Performance Monitoring Icon
Loopback

433
NE Operation Performance Monitoring
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 3 Page 3

Module objectives [cont.]

434
NE Operation Performance Monitoring
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

This page is left blank intentionally

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 3 Page 4

Table of Contents
Switch to notes view!
1 Power Measurements
1.1 Equipment Tab
1.2 Measurements Tab
1.3 Equipment View - Measurements Tab
1.4 Equipment View - Power Measurements Graphic
2 Diagnosis Menu
2.1 Diagnosis Menu
2.1.1 Diagnosis Menu - NE Alarms
2.1.2 Diagnosis Menu - Alarm Monitor
2.1.3 Diagnosis Menu - Event Log
2.1.4 Diagnosis Menu - Remote Inventory
2.1.5 Diagnosis Menu - Abnormal Condition List
2.1.6 Diagnosis Menu - Summary Block Diagram View
2.1.7 Summary Block Diagram - MPT Detail
2.2 MPT-HL (EPS) Equipment Protection - Tx Direction
2.3 MPT-HL (HSB) Transmission Protection
2.4 MPT-HL (EPS) Equipment Protection - Rx Direction
2.5 MPT-HL Radio Protection (RPS)
2.6 Diagnosis Menu - Current Configuration View
2.7 Diagnosis Menu - Performance Monitoring (PM)
2.8 Performance Monitoring Window
2.9 Ethernet Port PM
4 32.10
5
Radio QoS Ethernet Port PM
NE Operation Performance Monitoring
9500 2.11
MPR (Microwave
Packet Radio)
Radio
Port Operations
PM & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)
2.12 Adaptive Modulation PM
2.13 RSL History PM
3 Loopback
3.1 Equipment View - Loopback Tab
4 MOD300 IF Cable Loopback
4.1 MOD300 IF Cable Loopback
4.2 MOD300 IF Cable Loopback Block Diagram
4.3 Main Equipment Window - MOD300 Card Highlighted
4.4 Settings Tab
4.5 Loopback Tab
5 Core Facing PDH Tributary Loopback
5.1 Core Facing PDH Tributary Loopback
5.2 Core Facing PDH Tributary Loopback Block Diagram
5.3 Main Equipment Window - PDH Card Selected
5.4 PDH Main View - Loopback Tab
5.5 PDH Main View - Loopback Tab DS1 Port#07 Selected
5.5 PDH Main View - Loopback Tab DS1 Port#07 Selected
6 Line Facing PDH Tributary Loopback
6.1 Line Facing PDH Tributary Loopback
6.2 Line Facing PDH Tributary Loopback Block Diagram
6.3 Main Equipment Window - PDH Transponder Card Selected
6.4 PDH Main View - Loopback Tab
6.5 PDH Main View - Loopback Tab DS1 Port#07 Selected
6.6 Line Facing PDH Tributary Loopback Active
7 Radio Facing Circuit Loopback
7.1 Radio Facing Circuit Loopback
7.2 Main Equipment Window - MPT-HC Selected
7.3 PDH Main View - Loopback Tab
COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Page
7
8
9
10
11
13
14
15
16
18
19
20
22
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
34
35
36
37
38
39
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
65
66
67
68

Table of Contents [cont.]


Switch to notes view!

436
NE Operation Performance Monitoring
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Page

1 Power Measurements

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration,


3EM23954AHAA, DLP-123 for more details
437
NE Operation Performance Monitoring
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 3 Page 7

1 Power Measurements

1.1 Equipment Tab

1 Double-click icon

to be monitored

438
NE Operation Performance Monitoring
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 3 Page 8

1 Power Measurements

1.2 Measurements Tab

2 Click Measurements tab

439
NE Operation Performance Monitoring
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 3 Page 9

1 Power Measurements

1.3 Equipment View - Measurements Tab


4 Set parameters for

power measurement

3 Select channel

to measure

Click Start to show

5 real-time Power

Measurement Graph

4 3 10
NE Operation Performance Monitoring
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

The Measurement screen allows the operator to set initial parameters for the required measurement.
Measurement interval fields allow the operator to set the time duration of the measurement. The default
is Days: 7, Hours: 0, Minutes: 0. A 7-day measurement interval is also the maximum allowed interval.
Sample time field is the period between two consecutive measurement samples. The choice is among 2,
4, 6, 30, 60 sec.
The last section of the dialog is referred to an optional Power Measurement Log file that can be created.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 3 Page 10

1 Power Measurements

1.4 Equipment View - Power Measurements Graphic

4 3 11
NE Operation Performance Monitoring
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Verify the transmit (Ptx) and receive (Prx) power.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 3 Page 11

1 Power Measurements

1.4 Equipment View - Power Measurements Graphic [cont.]


These were taken at the same time. Why are the RX End
measurements different than the other channels measurements?

4 3 12
NE Operation Performance Monitoring
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 3 Page 12

2 Diagnosis Menu

4 3 13
NE Operation Performance Monitoring
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 3 Page 13

2 Diagnosis Menu

2.1 Diagnosis Menu

4 3 14
NE Operation Performance Monitoring
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 3 Page 14

2.1 Diagnosis Menu

2.1.1 Diagnosis Menu - NE Alarms


Select Diagnosis>
Alarms>
NE Alarms
or
Click Alarm Monitor

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration,


3EM23954AHAA, DLP-113 for more details
4 3 15
NE Operation Performance Monitoring
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Alarms from more than one NE can be monitored simultaneously:


1.

Open new instance of NEtO

2.

Enter IP address for new element you wish to monitor

3.

Click OK

4.

Click Alarm Monitor button

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 3 Page 15

2.1 Diagnosis Menu

2.1.2 Diagnosis Menu - Alarm Monitor


The Alarm Monitor allows the user to view current alarms and a log of
alarm activity.
The Alarm Monitor allows the user to view alarms by severity.

CURRENT_ALARMS: Global
ALARM_LOG: Global
CURRENT_ALARMS: CRI (Critical)
CURRENT_ALARMS: MAJ (Major)
CURRENT_ALARMS: MIN (Minor)
CURRENT_ALARMS: WRN (Warning)
CURRENT_ALARMS: IND (Indeterminate)
ALARM_LOG: CRI (Critical)
ALARM_LOG: MAJ (Major)
ALARM_LOG: MIN (Minor)
ALARM_LOG: WRN (Warning)
ALARM_LOG: IND (Indeterminate)
ALARM_LOG: CLR (Cleared)

4 3 16
NE Operation Performance Monitoring
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 3 Page 16

2.1 Diagnosis Menu

2.1.2 Diagnosis Menu - Alarm Monitor [cont.]

2 Double-click on any

alarm for full details

1 Click on any

alarm type

4 3 17
NE Operation Performance Monitoring
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 3 Page 17

2.1 Diagnosis Menu

2.1.3 Diagnosis Menu - Event Log

Print
Export

Refresh

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration,


3EM23954AHAA, DLP-129 for more details
4 3 18
NE Operation Performance Monitoring
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

The FRIENDLY NAME/ENTITY column identifies location of the alarming entity. The syntax is as follows:
r = rack number [01]
s = subrack (for MSS-4 and MSS-8 shelf equals [1], for MPT-HL Transceivers equals P8ETH slot number [3-8] and

SFP port number [5-8] associated with MPTHL Transceiver, for ODUs equals MOD300 slot number [3-8] associated
with ODU300, for MPT-HC Transceivers equals MPTACC slot number [3-8] and Ethernet port number [1-4]
associated with MPT-HC Transceiver or MPT-HC Transceivers equals CSM slot number [1] and Ethernet port number
[1-6] associated with MPT-HC Transceiver

Slot# = slot number of card in alarm [01-09]


board# = slot number of card in alarm [01-09]
b = board # (slot number of card in alarm [01-09])
Port# = port number of facility in alarm (for DS1 equals [01-32], for DS3 equals [01-02], for Ethernet facility

associated with CSM equals [1-6], for Ethernet facility associated with P8ETH equals [1-8])

Radio/Dir# = radio direction of radio channel in alarm (for MPT-HLs equals P8ETH slot number [3-8] . SFP port

number [5-8], for ODU300 equals MOD300 slot number [3-8], for MPT-HC equals MPTACC slot number [3-8] . port
number [1-4] or CSM slot number [1] . port number [1-6])

Ch# = channel number of radio channel in alarm for main channel equals 0 1, for spare channel equals 1 0
Daughter# = SFP port number (for CSM equals [5-6], for P8ETH equals [5-8]
MAU = Customer Ethernet signal

The following examples illustrate how to interpret the probable cause and friendly name combinations:
Example: Probable Cause: Replaceable Unit Missing
Friendly Name: r01s1/board#8
Translation: Missing card at r01 (rack 01) s1 (subrack 1 (MSS-8 Shelf)) /board#8 [provisioned for slot #8]
Friendly Name: r01s1b3/daughter#5

Translation: Missing SFP at r01 (rack 01) s1 (subrack 1 (MSS-8 Shelf)) b3 (P8ETH), SFP port #5]

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 3 Page 18

2.1 Diagnosis Menu

2.1.4 Diagnosis Menu - Remote Inventory

This screen is a read-only


screen, which shows
information about the
equipment

4 3 19
NE Operation Performance Monitoring
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 3 Page 19

2.1 Diagnosis Menu

2.1.5 Diagnosis Menu - Abnormal Condition List

Select Diagnosis>
Abnormal Condition List

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration,


3EM23954AHAA, DLP-114 for more details
4 3 20
NE Operation Performance Monitoring
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 3 Page 20

2.1 Diagnosis Menu

2.1.5 Diagnosis Menu - Abnormal Condition List [cont.]


The Abnormal Condition List option in the Diagnosis menu displays all the
abnormal conditions currently active in the NE.
An abnormal condition is generated each time a non-usual condition is
present in the NE, detected automatically (i.e., automatic Tx mute) or as
consequence of management systems operation (i.e., force switching,
loopbacks, manual Tx mute).

4 3 21
NE Operation Performance Monitoring
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 3 Page 21

2.1 Diagnosis Menu

2.1.6 Diagnosis Menu - Summary Block Diagram View


z The summary block diagram view provides a logical view of the radio

configuration, a synthesis of alarms, and the state of performance


monitoring ports and loopbacks.

Select Diagnosis>
Summary Block Diagram view

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration,


3EM23954AHAA, WebEML Craft Terminal Reference
Guide for more details
4 3 22
NE Operation Performance Monitoring
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 3 Page 22

2.1 Diagnosis Menu

2.1.6 Diagnosis Menu - Summary Block Diagram View [cont.]


Each entity has an alarm indicator (colored ball icon) which indicates its
status. The alarm indicators update automatically with changes to the
entity alarm status.
The current configuration of the MSS-8 shelf is displayed including the
equipped card types (CSM-E/Core-E, PDH [DS1/3], MPTACC, MOD300, or
EAS/P8ETH), provisioned protection schemes, and provisioned crossconnections between the different equipment ports.

4 3 23
NE Operation Performance Monitoring
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 3 Page 23

2.1 Diagnosis Menu

2.1.6 Diagnosis Menu - Summary Block Diagram View [cont.]

Double-click on icons to open associated screens


4 3 24
NE Operation Performance Monitoring
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

In the summary block diagram view, the current configuration of the MSS shelf is displayed including the
equipped card types (CSM, PDH [DS1/3], MPTACC, MOD300 or P8ETH), provisioned protection schemes,
and provisioned cross connections between the different equipment ports.
Each entity has an alarm indicator (colored ball icon) which indicates the alarm status of the entity. Refer
to Severity Alarm Synthesis Area for definitions of supported alarm severities and their associated colors.
The alarm indicators update automatically with changes to the entity alarm status.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 3 Page 24

2.1 Diagnosis Menu

2.1.7 Summary Block Diagram - MPT Detail

Double-click on Slot 3 Port 5 (RF section)


4 3 25
NE Operation Performance Monitoring
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Active signal paths, TX, and RX are displayed with a green line, including all possible switching paths and
the current status of the switch. The active signal path updates automatically with changes to the
protection switch state (EPS, HSB, and Rx Radio).
Some slots and ports display an icon representing Loopback. When the loopback icon is present the
associated slot or port supports a loopback feature. When a loopback is active the icon is displayed
green. While in a detail view, double-clicking the loopback icon navigates the user to the associated
loopback tab.
Navigation options available from the summary block diagram view include:
detailed block diagrams
Ethernet Physical Interface tab
Synchronization tab
Protection Schemes tab
Performance Monitoring Tool
Loopback tab
TMN Local Interface tab
Abnormal Condition List

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 3 Page 25

2 Diagnosis Menu

2.2 MPT-HL (EPS) Equipment Protection - Tx Direction

MPT-HL

GigE IF

GigE IF

EPS

Tx

QOS/
/
Framer
Framer

Modem
Modem

RF RF

QOS/
Framer

Modem
Modem

RF RF

EPS

4 3 26
NE Operation Performance Monitoring
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

Tx

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

The diagram shows the transmission data path (i.e., EAS/P8ETH to MPT-HL Radio).
The green lines show the data path that is carrying traffic frames.
The red line shows the inactive data path.
The blue box shows the active MPT-HL instance.

The traffic frames are bridged after the QoS/Framer block and sent to an EPS-Tx selector on the local
board and to an EPS-Tx selector on the mate board.
The frames are sent to the mate board over the MPT-HL shelf backplane.
The selectors on each MPT-HL board are positioned to select traffic from the active board.
The Modem blocks on each board receive the exact same data.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 3 Page 26

2 Diagnosis Menu

2.3 MPT-HL (HSB) Transmission Protection

EPS -

Tx
Modem
Modem

RF RF

TPS Logic

TPS - Tx

TPS Logic

Modem
Modem
EPS

RF RF

- Tx

4 3 27
NE Operation Performance Monitoring
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Transmission Protection Switching (TPS)- Hot Standby (HSB) is supported when the MPT-HL instances are
configured in any of the 1+1 HSB protection schemes.
The diagram shows the transmission data path (i.e., EAS/P8ETH to Radio) for TPS.
The green lines show the data path that is carrying traffic frames.
The red line shows the inactive data path.
The blue box shows the active MPT-HL instance.

The traffic frames are bridged after the QoS/Framer block and sent an EPS-Tx selector on the local board
and to an EPS-Tx selector on the mate board. The frames are sent to the mate board over the MPT-HL
shelf backplane.
The EPS-Tx selectors on each MPT-HL board are positioned to select traffic from the active board. The
Modem blocks on each board receive the exact same data.
The RF block on each MPT-HL instance (i.e., main and spare) supplies a transmit signal to the TPS-Tx
selector. The TPS-Tx selector is an external relay switch.
The TPS decision machines on the MPT-HL instances will coordinate which transmit signal to use based on
failures and manual switch commands. The TPS switching decisions are completely independent of the
EPS switch status of the MPT-HL.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 3 Page 27

2 Diagnosis Menu

RPS
Rx
QOS/
Framer

4 3 28
NE Operation Performance Monitoring
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

Modem

RFRF

Modem

Rx
EPS

Modem

Modem

QOS/
Framer

GigE
IF

GigE
IF

RPS
Rx

Alignment

Rx
EPS

Alignment

2.4 MPT-HL (EPS) Equipment Protection - Rx Direction

RFRF

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

The figure shows the reception data path (i.e., Radio to EAS/P8ETH).
The green lines show the data paths that are carrying traffic frames.
The red line shows the inactive data path.
The blue box shows the active MPT-HL instance.

The selector on each MPT-HL board is positioned to select traffic if the board is active and to discard traffic
if the board is standby.
As a result, no traffic frames are sent from the standby MPT-HL towards the EAS/P8ETH module in MSS
shelf.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 3 Page 28

2 Diagnosis Menu

Modem

Modem

RF RF

Modem

RPS
Rx

QOS/
Framer

Modem

EPS
Rx

Alignment

GigE
IF

Alignment

2.5 MPT-HL Radio Protection (RPS)

RFRF

RPS Logic

RPS Logic
GigE
IF

EPS
Rx

QOS/
Framer

4 3 29
NE Operation Performance Monitoring
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

RPS
Rx

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Radio Protection Switching (RPS) is supported when the MPT-HL instances are configured in any of the
1+1 protection schemes.
The diagram shows the relationship between the RPS logic instances.
The radio frames coming from the Modem block are bridged and sent to the Alignment block on the local
board and to the Alignment block on the mate board.
The Alignment block aligns the frames to compensate for the delay differences in each radio path so that a
hitless switch between the paths is possible.
The RPS-Rx logic will control the selector based on the highest quality signal as well as factoring in the
user switch commands.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 3 Page 29

2 Diagnosis Menu

2.6 Diagnosis Menu - Current Configuration View


The Current Configuration View displays the current system configuration
information
Select Diagnosis>
Current Configuration View

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration,


3EM23954AHAA, DLP-116 for more details
4 3 30
NE Operation Performance Monitoring
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 3 Page 30

2 Diagnosis Menu

2.7 Diagnosis Menu - Performance Monitoring (PM)


Select Diagnosis>
Performance Monitoring
or
Click Alarm Monitor

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration,


3EM23954AHAA, DLP-122 for more details
4 3 31
NE Operation Performance Monitoring
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 3 Page 31

2 Diagnosis Menu

2.7 Diagnosis Menu - Performance Monitoring (PM) [cont.]


PM provides a QoS indication for the Radio and Link Hop Sections:
Radio Hop - Unprotected radio channel (before RPS in 1+1 radio
configurations)
Link Hop - Protected radio channel (after RPS in 1+1 radio configurations)

Adaptive Modulation PM captures the modulation scheme used on the Tx


side when adaptive modulation is enabled. In 1+1 HSB radio
configuration, the statistics are associated with the link level after RPS.
Not supported in 1+1 FD radio configurations.
Defect second:
Radio Hop Section - second in which an LOF or DemFail occurs
Link Hop Section - second in which an LOF occurs at the link level after RPS

Errored Block:
Radio Hop Section - number of errored blocks
Link Hop Section - number of errored block at the link level after RPS

4 3 32
NE Operation Performance Monitoring
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 3 Page 32

2 Diagnosis Menu

2.7 Diagnosis Menu - Performance Monitoring (PM) [cont.]


Four PM counters are supported:
Errored Second (ES) - When a defect second is set or if there is at least one
or more errored blocks.
Severely Errored Seconds (SES) - When a defect second is set and if the
errored block count is greater or equal to 30% of the blocks in one second.
Background Block Error (BBE) - The number of block errors in a one second
period and the second is not an SES.
Unavailable Seconds (UAS) - A time period starting after ten consecutive SES
events are detected. The qualifying ten consecutive SES seconds are included
in the UAS time period. Ending upon the detection of ten consecutive non SES
events. These non SES seconds are not included in the UAS time period.

PM data is collected for 15 minute and 24 hour time periods. One current
register and 96 history reports are available for 15 minute period. One
current register and 8 history reports are available for 24 hour time
period.

4 3 33
NE Operation Performance Monitoring
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 3 Page 33

2 Diagnosis Menu

2.8 Performance Monitoring Window

3 Click PM Status

icon

1 Select Ethernet

Statistics

2 Select card to

monitor

4 3 34
NE Operation Performance Monitoring
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Physical Level Management (PLM) is in charge of the complete management of the PM on CSM-E/Core-E
monitoring points (radio hop and link):

monitoring activation/deactivation

collection of PM counters values by means of a periodic polling (1 Sec.) on HW components

storing of the PM counters value that can be retrieved by Infomodel Level Management (ILM) on
request

generation and management of history data

management of the thresholds configuration used for threshold crossing alarm (TCA) management

Threshold Crossing Alarm (TCA) and Unavailable Time alarms detection and reporting to ILM
The CT/NMS will monitor only the counters related to Ethernet traffic.
TTO (Total Transmitted Octets)
TTF (Total Transmitted Frames)
TDF (Total Discarded Frames)

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 3 Page 34

2 Diagnosis Menu

2.9 Ethernet Port PM

4 3 35
NE Operation Performance Monitoring
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Ethernet PM provides an indication of the QoS for the Ethernet port. Two groups of Ethernet PM are available:
Ethernet Aggregate Tx PM supports the following counters:

Total Transmitted Octets (TTO)Equals the number of good transmitted Octets on the port.

Total Transmitted Frames (TTF)Equals the total number of good transmitted frames on the port.

Total Discarded Frames (TDF)Equals the number of transmitted frames discarded on the port.

TTF UnicastEquals the number of good transmitted Unicast frames on the port.

TTF MulticastEquals the number of good transmitted Multicast frames on the port.

TTF BroadcastEquals the number of good transmitted Broadcast frames on the port.

Ethernet Aggregate Rx PM supports the following counters:

Total Received Octets (TRO)Equals the number of received octets on the port including; good, FCS,
Alignment errors, undersized, fragment, and oversized packets.

Total Received Frames (TRF)Equals the number of received frames on the port including; good, FCS,
Alignment errors, undersized, fragment, and oversized packets.

Total Received Frames (TRSEF)Equals the number of received errored frames on the port including; FCS,
Alignment errors, undersized, fragment, and oversized packets.

Total Discarded Frames (TDF)Equals the number of received frames discarded.

TRF UnicastEquals the number of good received Unicast frames on the port.

TRF MulticastEquals the number of good received Multicast frames on the port.

TRF BroadcastEquals the number of good received Broadcast frames on the port.

Radio QoS Ethernet statistics are related to radio QoS queues (queues 1 to 5) for each Tx radio direction. Radio QoS
Ethernet PM supports the following counters per queue:
Total Transmitted Octets (TTO)Equals the number of good transmitted Octets on the port.
Total Transmitted Frames (TTF)Equals the total number of good transmitted frames on the port.
Total Discarded Frames (TDF)Equals the number of transmitted frames discarded on the port.
Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 3 Page 35

2 Diagnosis Menu

2.10 Radio QoS Ethernet Port PM

4 3 36
NE Operation Performance Monitoring
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Radio Ethernet PM provides an indication of the QoS for the radio Ethernet port. The Radio QoS
Ethernet statistics are related to radio QoS queues (queues 1 to 5) for each Tx radio direction. Queue
5 is the highest priority queue and queue 1 is the lowest priority queue

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 3 Page 36

2 Diagnosis Menu

2.11 Radio Port PM

4 3 37
NE Operation Performance Monitoring
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Radio Hop Section and Link Hop Section are defined as follows:
Radio Hop Section-The unprotected radio channel (before RPS in 1+1 radio configurations)
Link Hop Section-The protected radio channel (after RPS); Only supported in 1+1 radio configurations.

Adaptive Modulation PM captures the modulation scheme used on the Tx side when adaptive modulation is
enabled. In 1+1 HSB radio configuration, the statistics are associated with the link level after RPS.
Adaptive Modulation PM is not supported in 1+1 FD radio configurations.
Defect second on a radio hop section, is a second in which an LOF or DemFail occurs.
Defect second on a link hop section, is a second in which an LOF occurs at the link level after RPS.
Errored Block count for a radio hop section equals the number of errored blocks.
Errored Block count for a link hop section equals the number of link level errored blocks after RPS.
Four PM counters are supported as follows:
Errored Second (ES)-When a defect second is set or if there is at least one or more errored blocks.
Severely Errored Seconds (SES)-When a defect second is set and if the errored block count is greater or

equal to 30% of the blocks in one second.

Background Block Error (BBE)-The number of block errors in a one second period and the second is not

an SES.

Unavailable Seconds (UAS)-A time period starting after ten consecutive SES events are detected. The

qualifying ten consecutive SES seconds are included in the UAS time period. Ending upon the detection
of ten consecutive non SES events. These non SES seconds are not included in the UAS time period.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 3 Page 37

2 Diagnosis Menu

2.12 Adaptive Modulation PM

4 3 38
NE Operation Performance Monitoring
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Adaptive Modulation PM captures the modulation scheme used for the transmitter when adaptive
modulation is enabled. In 1+1 HSB radio configuration, the statistics are associated with the link
level after Radio Protection Switching. Adaptive Modulation PM is not supported in 1+1 FD radio
configurations.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 3 Page 38

2 Diagnosis Menu

2.13 RSL History PM

4 3 39
NE Operation Performance Monitoring
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

RSL History PM provides an indication of the radio power levels of the transmitters and receivers
associated with the Radio Hop Section and Radio Link Section for both the local and far-end.
Additionally, RSL History PM captures the TPS and RPS switch statuses, and HBER alarms for both the
local and the far-end.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 3 Page 39

Blank page

4 3 40
NE Operation Performance Monitoring
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

This page is left blank intentionally

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 3 Page 40

3 Loopback

4 3 41
NE Operation Performance Monitoring
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 3 Page 41

3 Loopback

3.1 Equipment View - Loopback Tab

4 3 42
NE Operation Performance Monitoring
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Loopback indicates entity has a loopback activated at the near end.


When the loopback is activated the traffic received from the radio side is redirected toward the radio itself.
When loop is enabled
TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH flows are looped back with source and destination MAC address swapped.
Generic Ethernet flows are dropped.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 3 Page 42

4 MOD300 IF Cable Loopback

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration,


3EM23954AHAA, DLP-130 for more details
4 3 43
NE Operation Performance Monitoring
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 3 Page 43

4 MOD300 IF Cable Loopback

4.1 MOD300 IF Cable Loopback


IF cable loopback is active only on the cross-connections associated with
TDM2TDM and TDM2Eth profiles. Loopback of Ethernet traffic is not
supported.
Can be activated from the local NE only

4 3 44
NE Operation Performance Monitoring
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 3 Page 44

4 MOD300 IF Cable Loopback

4.2 MOD300 IF Cable Loopback Block Diagram

4 3 45
NE Operation Performance Monitoring
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 3 Page 45

4 MOD300 IF Cable Loopback

4.3 Main Equipment Window - MOD300 Card Highlighted

1 Double-click the

MOD300 card

4 3 46
NE Operation Performance Monitoring
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 3 Page 46

4 MOD300 IF Cable Loopback

4.4 Settings Tab


1 Double-click icon

to be monitored

2 Select Adaptive

Modulation

5 Click Yes

3 Click TxMute Enable

6 Click OK

4 Click Apply

4 3 47
NE Operation Performance Monitoring
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 3 Page 47

4 MOD300 IF Cable Loopback

4.5 Loopback Tab


1 Select Loopback tab
2 Select IF cable

6 Click Apply

3 Select Active radio button


4 Enter Timeout Period

5 Click Apply

4 3 48
NE Operation Performance Monitoring
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 3 Page 48

5 Core Facing PDH Tributary Loopback

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration,


3EM23954AHAA, DLP-133 for more details
4 3 49
NE Operation Performance Monitoring
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 3 Page 49

5 Core Facing PDH Tributary Loopback

5.1 Core Facing PDH Tributary Loopback


Core Facing PDH Tributary Loopback uses the signal from the
CSM-E/Core-E switch matrix to be transmitted by the PDH transponder
card and replaces the signal received by the PDH transponder and sends
the signal back to the CSM-E/Core-E switch matrix
Core Facing PDH Tributary Loopback is a drop-and-continue internal
loopback
Core Facing PDH Tributary Loopback can be activated on a per tributary
basis independent of the other PDH tributaries.
Core Facing PDH Tributary Loopback is supported on DS1 and DS3
tributaries

4 3 50
NE Operation Performance Monitoring
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 3 Page 50

5 Core Facing PDH Tributary Loopback

5.2 Core Facing PDH Tributary Loopback Block Diagram

4 3 51
NE Operation Performance Monitoring
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 3 Page 51

5 Core Facing PDH Tributary Loopback

5.3 Main Equipment Window - PDH Card Selected

Double-click the PDH


transponder card associated
with the tributary

4 3 52
NE Operation Performance Monitoring
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 3 Page 52

5 Core Facing PDH Tributary Loopback

5.4 PDH Main View - Loopback Tab

Select Loopback tab

4 3 53
NE Operation Performance Monitoring
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 3 Page 53

5 Core Facing PDH Tributary Loopback

5.5 PDH Main View - Loopback Tab DS1 Port#07 Selected

Select DS1 Port#nn/External

4 3 54
NE Operation Performance Monitoring
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 3 Page 54

5 Core Facing PDH Tributary Loopback

5.6 Core Facing PDH Tributary Loopback Active

1 Select Active

2 Enter Timeout Period

(4 days maximum)

3 Click Apply

4 3 55
NE Operation Performance Monitoring
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 3 Page 55

Blank page
Switch to notes view!

4 3 56

This page intentionally left blank

NE Operation Performance Monitoring


9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 3 Page 56

6 Line Facing PDH Tributary Loopback

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration,


3EM23954AHAA, DLP-134 for more details
4 3 57
NE Operation Performance Monitoring
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 3 Page 57

6 Line Facing PDH Tributary Loopback

6.1 Line Facing PDH Tributary Loopback


Line Facing PDH Tributary Loopback mode uses the received line tributary
input signal to the PDH transponder card and sends the signal back to
the transmit line tributary output signal
Line Facing PDH Tributary Loopback is a drop-and-continue line external
loopback
Line Facing PDH Tributary Loopback can be activated on a per tributary
basis independent of the other PDH tributaries.
Core Facing PDH Tributary Loopback is only supported on DS1 tributaries
(P32E1DS1 card)

4 3 58
NE Operation Performance Monitoring
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 3 Page 58

6 Line Facing PDH Tributary Loopback

6.2 Line Facing PDH Tributary Loopback Block Diagram

4 3 59
NE Operation Performance Monitoring
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 3 Page 59

6 Line Facing PDH Tributary Loopback

6.3 Main Equipment Window - PDH Transponder Card Selected

Double-click the
PDH transponder
card associated
with the tributary

4 3 60
NE Operation Performance Monitoring
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 3 Page 60

6 Line Facing PDH Tributary Loopback

6.4 PDH Main View - Loopback Tab

Select Loopback tab

4 3 61
NE Operation Performance Monitoring
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 3 Page 61

6 Line Facing PDH Tributary Loopback

6.5 PDH Main View - Loopback Tab DS1 Port#07 Selected

Select DS1 Port#nn/External

4 3 62
NE Operation Performance Monitoring
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 3 Page 62

6 Line Facing PDH Tributary Loopback

6.6 Line Facing PDH Tributary Loopback Active

1 Select Active

2 Enter Timeout Period

(4 days maximum)

3 Click Apply

4 3 63
NE Operation Performance Monitoring
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 3 Page 63

Blank page

4 3 64

This page intentionally left blank

NE Operation Performance Monitoring


9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 3 Page 64

7 Radio Facing Circuit Loopback

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration,


3EM23954AHAA, DLP-143 for more details
4 3 65
NE Operation Performance Monitoring
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 3 Page 65

7 Radio Facing Circuit Loopback

7.1 Radio Facing Circuit Loopback


Radio Facing Circuit Loopback mode is an internal loopback that uses the
receive data interface signal on the MPT-HC Transceiver and replaces the
signal to be transmitted by the MPT-HC Transceiver and sends the
receive signal back to the far-end MPT-HC Transceiver.
Only possible to enable on the aggregate traffic
Loop and continue process
MPT-HC Transceiver transmit traffic will be dropped
When this loopback is activated the expected behavior is as follows:
TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH flows are forwarded back to Core card with
source and destination MAC addresses swapped.
y For TDM2ETH flows, where the ECID Tx and ECID Rx are the same value, the
loopback works.
y For TDM2ETH flows, where the ECID Tx is different form ECID Rx, the loopback
fails.

Generic Ethernet flows are dropped.

4 3 66
NE Operation Performance Monitoring
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 3 Page 66

7 Radio Facing Circuit Loopback

7.2 Main Equipment Window - MPT-HC Selected

Double-click the MPT-HC


to be monitored

4 3 67
NE Operation Performance Monitoring
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 3 Page 67

7 Radio Facing Circuit Loopback

7.3 PDH Main View - Loopback Tab


1 Select Loobback tab

3 Select RADIOFACING
3 Select Active

4 Enter Timeout Period

(4 days maximum)

5 Click Apply

4 3 68
NE Operation Performance Monitoring
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 3 Page 68

Module summary
Power Measurements
Alarms
Event Log
Remote Inventory
Abnormal Condition List
Summary Block Diagram View
Current Configuration View
Performance Monitoring Icon
Loopback

4 3 69
NE Operation Performance Monitoring
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 3 Page 69

End of module
Performance Monitoring

4 3 70
NE Operation Performance Monitoring
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 3 Page 70

Do not delete this graphic elements in here:

Section 4
NE Operation
Module 4
Alarm Monitor

TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio)


Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)
TWT42013 Edition 1.1

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2012

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 4 Page 1

Blank page

442
NE Operation Alarm Monitor
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

This page is left blank intentionally


Document History
Edition

Date

Author

Remarks

01

2009-07-27

Robinson, Ken

First edition

2.01

2010-07-30

Moehlenkamp, John

Revised to release 2.01

2.02

2010-11-30

Moehlenkamp, John

Revised to release 2.02

3.0

2011-02-28

Moehlenkamp, John

Revised to release 3.0

3.01

2011-06-29

Moehlenkamp, John

Revised to release 3.01

3.02

2011-11-15

Moehlenkamp, John

Updated format and revised to release 3.02

3.03

2012-02-07

Moehlenkamp, John

Revised to release 3.03

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 4 Page 2

Module objectives
Upon completion of this module, you should be able to:

Recognize the meaning of Status and Alarm LEDs


Find MPT-HL alarm display using Equipment Menu
Find alarm display using Diagnosis Menu
Find alarm display using Alarm Monitor
List some causes of MPT-HL alarms
List details of an alarm
Describe MPT-HL Receive Signal Level (RSL) history

443
NE Operation Alarm Monitor
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 4 Page 3

Module objectives [cont.]

444
NE Operation Alarm Monitor
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

This page is left blank intentionally

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 4 Page 4

Table of Contents
Switch to notes view!
1 Alarm LEDs
1.1 CSM-E/Core-E Card
1.2 EAS/P8ETH Card
1.3 MPTACC Card
1.4 MOD300
1.5 AUX Card
1.6 MPT-HL Transceiver
1.7 Fan 2U Card with Alarms
1.8 MSS-1c
2 Alarms in Network Overview
2.1 Alarm Synthesis
2.2 Alarm Supervision
3 Alarm in Main Views
3.1 NE Main View - Alarm & State Panels
3.2 NE Main View - Alarm & State Panel LEDs
3.3 Equipment View - MPT-HL - Alarms
4 Alarm Monitor
4.1 Alarm Monitor
4.2 Monitoring Multiple Networks
4.3 Alarm Monitor
4.4 Alarm Details
5 MPT-HL RSL History
4 45.1
5 RSL History
NE Operation Alarm Monitor
9500 5.2
MPR (Microwave
Radio)History
Operations & Maintenance
R3.03 (ANSI)
ViewPacket
RSL
- Online
5.3 View RSL History - Offline

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 4 Page 5

Page
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
18
19
22
23
24
26
27
28
29
33
34
36
42

17
21

25

Table of Contents [cont.]


Switch to notes view!

446
NE Operation Alarm Monitor
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

This page is left blank intentionally

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 4 Page 6

1 Alarm LEDs

447
NE Operation Alarm Monitor
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 4 Page 7

1 Alarm LEDs

1.1 CSM-E/Core-E Card

NE W - Warning alarm

NE A - Abnormal alarm

NE m - minor alarm

S - Module Status

NE M - Major alarm

Link

Reset

Activity

448
NE Operation Alarm Monitor
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Check front-panel LED indications


INDICATOR
Link (L)
Green

STATUS
Off
Link Up

DEFINITION
Link Down

Activity (A)

Off
Blinking Yellow

No Tx/Rx activity
Tx/Rx activity

NE Major Alarm (M)

Red

At least one alarm is present on the NE with major severity is present on the NE

NE Minor Alarm (m)

Red

At least one alarm is present on the NE with minor severity is present on the NE

NE Warning Alarm (W)

Yellow

At least one alarm is present on the NE with warning severity is present on the NE

NE Abnormal Condition (A)

Yellow

At least one abnormal condition is present on the NE

Status (S)

Off
Green Blinking
Green
Yellow
Red
Blinking Red

Card not equipped, not provisioned, or not powered


Download, software Booting, or flash card realignment in progress
In Service, Normal Operation, and Properly Provisioned
In protect, properly provisioned as EPS
Card fail
Card mismatch

Always check to see if symptoms match the alarm.


LEDs provide summary alarm indications, which can help narrow down the location and type of failure.
The LEDs on the CSM-E/Core-E front panel for each Ethernet connector are a good indicator of correct connectivity and activity on the
Ethernet port.
Where a Status LED on a plug-in is off (unlit), but power to the MSS-8 is confirmed by LEDs on other plug-ins, check the seating of the
affected plug-in.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 4 Page 8

1 Alarm LEDs

1.2 EAS/P8ETH Card


S - Module Status

Link

Link (L)

Activity

Off
Green

Link Down
Link Up

Off
Blinking Yellow

No Tx/Rx activity
Tx/Rx activity

Activity (A)

449
NE Operation Alarm Monitor
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 4 Page 9

1 Alarm LEDs

1.3 MPTACC Card


- Power Emission Status 1

- Power Emission Status 2

S - Module Status

M Power Emission
Status
Link

Link (L)

Activity

Off
Green

Link Down
Link Up

Off
Blinking Yellow

No Tx/Rx activity
Tx/Rx activity

Off

No output power (e.g.: hot-standby transmitter,


software booting, or FPGA download in progress)
Normal output power
Forced squelch enabled on craft terminal or unit is in
protect
Abnormal output power

Activity (A)

Power Emission Status ( ) LED


Green
Yellow
Red
4 4 10
NE Operation Alarm Monitor
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 4 Page 10

1 Alarm LEDs

1.4 MOD300

S Module Status
- Power Emission Status

Power Emission Status ( ) LED


Off
Green
Yellow
Red

No output power (e.g.: hot-standby transmitter,


software booting, or FPGA download in progress)
Normal output power
Forced squelch enabled on craft terminal
Abnormal output power

4 4 11
NE Operation Alarm Monitor
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 4 Page 11

1 Alarm LEDs

1.5 AUX Card

Housekeeping

S - Module Status

E - EOW Line Status

EOW Line Status (E) LED (for future use)


The AUX card provides 13 housekeeping alarms:

6 station alarm inputs


7 station alarm outputs
The MSS-4/8 shelves support up to one AUX card per shelf.

4 4 12
NE Operation Alarm Monitor
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 4 Page 12

1 Alarm LEDs

1.6 MPT-HL Transceiver


Activity

Link

Link (L)

S - Module Status

- Power Emission Status

Off
Green

Link Down
Link Up

Off
Blinking Yellow

No Tx/Rx activity
Tx/Rx activity

Off

No output power (e.g.: TPS in standby, software


booting, or FPGA download in progress)
No output power (forced squelch enabled on craft
terminal (TX mute active, PA in Off position)
Normal output power

Activity (A)

Power Emission Status ( ) LED


Blinking Green
Green
4 4 13
NE Operation Alarm Monitor
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 4 Page 13

1 Alarm LEDs

1.7 Fan 2U Card with Alarms


Fan

Summary

Batt A

Batt B

Major

Minor

ACO/LT

Indicator LED Description


Fan

Not supported

Batt A

Not supported

Batt B
Summary
Major
Minor
ACO/LT

Alarm Output

Pins

Status

14 & 15

NC

Not supported
On

Major or Minor alarm present

Red

Major alarm present

8 & 10

NO

Yellow Minor alarm present

4&5

NO

Unused

4 4 14
NE Operation Alarm Monitor
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 4 Page 14

1 Alarm LEDs

1.8 MSS-1c
MPT 1 - Status
NE W - Warning alarm
NE M - Major alarm
Link

Activity

NE m - minor alarm
NE A - Abnormal alarm

4 4 15
NE Operation Alarm Monitor
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Check front-panel LED indications


INDICATOR
Link (L)

STATUS
Off
Green

DEFINITION
Link Down
Link Up

Activity (A)

Off
Blinking Yellow

No Tx/Rx activity
Tx/Rx activity

Major Alarm (M)

Red

At least one alarm is present on the NE with major severity

Minor Alarm (m)

Red

At least one alarm is present on the NE with minor severity (not supported)

Warning Alarm (W)

Yellow

At least one alarm is present on the NE with warning severity (not supported)

Abnormal Condition (A)

Yellow

At least one abnormal condition is present on the NE


- Tx Power muted by operator
- ACM frozen by operator
- MPT loopback active

MPT1

MPT2

Off
Green
Yellow
Red

MPT
MPT
MPT
MPT

is
is
is
is

not emitting power according with the known configuration


emitting power as expected according the known configuration
not emitting power due to a forced Squelch condition
ABNORMALLY emitting power

(not supported)

At start-up the MSS-1c:


lights on all the alarm LEDs (Major, Minor, Warning and Abnormal)
lights on the MPT LED as yellow, then this LED will be green, red, or yellow, as explained above.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 4 Page 15

Blank page
Switch to notes view!

4 4 16

This page intentionally left blank

NE Operation Alarm Monitor


9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 4 Page 16

2 Alarms in Network Overview

4 4 17
NE Operation Alarm Monitor
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 4 Page 17

2 Alarms in Network Overview

2.1 Alarm Synthesis

4 4 18
NE Operation Alarm Monitor
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

When you are connected to an NE, you get an Alarm overview.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 4 Page 18

2 Alarms in Network Overview

2.2 Alarm Supervision

1
Green - ongoing supervision
Red - NE link not working
Gray - supervision not active

Default Alarm colors

(Also appears in System Tray)

Major alarm
Minor alarm
Warning alarm
Indeterminate
No Active alarms
Displays Summary of all
Active Alarms for this NE

Icon in system tray displays


highest alarm level in NE
4 4 19
NE Operation Alarm Monitor
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Icon in System Tray (highest alarm level in NE)


Gray: Supervision is not active
Red: Highest alarm is Critical
Orange: Highest alarm is Major
Yellow: Highest alarm is Minor
Cyan: Highest alarm is Warning
Blue: Highest alarm is Indeterminate
Green: No Active Alarms

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 4 Page 19

Blank page
Switch to notes view!

4 4 20

This page intentionally left blank

NE Operation Alarm Monitor


9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 4 Page 20

3 Alarm in Main Views

4 4 21
NE Operation Alarm Monitor
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 4 Page 21

3 Alarm in Main Views

3.1 NE Main View - Alarm & State Panels


Domain Alarm
Synthesis Area

Local Access: Granted

After Show is selected


and login is complete

Operation State Enabled:


Communications Link Up
Supervision State: Supervised

Status Control Area

OS: Not Connected


NTP Protocol Enabled: Both
Servers Reachable
Abnormal Conditions: False

4 4 22
NE Operation Alarm Monitor
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Domain Alarm Synthesis Panel


EXT - External Point (Housekeeping alarm).
EQP Equipment alarm
TRS Transmission alarm
Management State Control Panel
Put mouse over icon to read state.
Icon with a key symbol: Local Access state: indicates whether the NE is managed by a craft terminal or by
the Operation System (OS).
COM icon: Operational state: indicates whether or not the communication with the OS is established.
SUP icon: Supervision state: indicates whether or not the NE is under OS supervision.
ALI icon: Alignment state.
OS icon: OS isolation.
NTP (Network Time Protocol) Server Status icon.
AC icon: Abnormal Condition state indicates whether some abnormal conditions have been recognized. The
operator can visualize them with the Diagnosis-> Abnormal Condition List menu.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 4 Page 22

3 Alarm in Main Views

3.2 NE Main View - Alarm & State Panel LEDs

ORANGE LED
GREEN LED
CYAN LED
Red LED

4 4 23
NE Operation Alarm Monitor
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Local Access State


z GREEN LED: Indicates that the Craft Terminal has the OS permission to manage the NE (granted).
z CYAN LED: Indicates that the Craft Terminal has not received OS permission to manage the NE (denied).
COM NE reachable/unreachable
z GREEN LED: Identifies the Enable operational state of the connection between NE and Craft Terminal (link up).
z RED LED: Identifies the Disable operational state of the connection between NE and Craft Terminal (link down).
SUP Supervision state
z GREEN LED: NE is under supervision
z ORANGE LED: NE is not under supervision
ALI Alignment state of the EML manager and NE MIB.
z GREEN LED: Configuration is aligned (is equal between EML manager and NE MIB).
z ORANGE LED: Configuration is not aligned (is not equal between EML manager and NE MIB).
OS OS isolation
z GREEN LED: NE is not managed by the 1353SH.
z CYAN LED: NE is managed by the 1353SH.
NTP Network Timing Protocol
z ORANGE LED: Protocol disabled
z GREEN LED: Protocol enabled, but the two servers are unreachable.
z CYAN LED: Protocol enabled and one of the two servers is reachable.
AC Abnormal Condition
z GREEN LED: Normal operating condition.
z CYAN LED: Detection of an ABNORMAL operative condition. Type: switch forcing.
Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 4 Page 23

3 Alarm in Main Views

3.3 Equipment View - MPT-HL - Alarms


1

Select Equipment tab

2 Select Alarms tab

4 4 24
NE Operation Alarm Monitor
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Possible Problems
Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) High Power Timeout indicates that the local transmitter was
operating continuously at full power for 5-minutes, and the transmitter power was reduced to its minimum
power setting.

ATPC Loop indicates loss of ATPC command path between far end transmitter and local receiver.

TxMute indicates a manual or automatic mute command has been executed. Using Craft Terminal, release
TxMute.

Incompatible PTX indicates the configured transmit power value is not supported by the MPT.

MPT-HL not Responding indicates a loss of communications with the MPT. Replace MPT-HL module. If
MPT-HL still not responding, replace communication link between MPT-HL and CSM-E/Core-E or
EAS/P8ETH.

MPT-HL Replacement Notes


Always verify component state again before removal.

In an unprotected radio, performing the MPT-HL removal and replacement procedure will cause loss of
traffic.

Remove battery power to MPT. Disconnect cable from SFP. Loosen four shelf mounting screws and
remove MPT.

When replacing MPT-HL slowly push replacement MPT-HL into shelf making sure contact is made with
backplane connectors.

After replacement, verify MPT-HL alarms are cleared and MPR is capable of carrying traffic.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 4 Page 24

4 Alarm Monitor

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration,


3EM23954AHAA, DLP-113 for more details
4 4 25
NE Operation Alarm Monitor
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 4 Page 25

4 Alarm Monitor

4.1 Alarm Monitor

4 4 26
NE Operation Alarm Monitor
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 4 Page 26

4 Alarm Monitor

4.2 Monitoring Multiple Networks

4 4 27
NE Operation Alarm Monitor
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

After changing IP address or DNS name, select OK. Then select Alarm Monitor to monitor more than one
Network Element.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 4 Page 27

4 Alarm Monitor

4.3 Alarm Monitor

Double-click on
alarm for details

4 4 28
NE Operation Alarm Monitor
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Alarm Monitor takes you directly to alarms screen.


ID and Password is not needed to view alarms.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 4 Page 28

4 Alarm Monitor

4.4 Alarm Details

4 4 29
NE Operation Alarm Monitor
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

When replacing fans contact next level of technical support for assistance.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 4 Page 29

Blank page
Switch to notes view!

4 4 30

This page intentionally left blank

NE Operation Alarm Monitor


9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 4 Page 30

Exercise

Lab Exercise 12
Alarm Monitor

Time allowed:

4 4 31
NE Operation Alarm Monitor
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 4 Page 31

Blank page
Switch to notes view!

4 4 32

This page intentionally left blank

NE Operation Alarm Monitor


9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 4 Page 32

5 MPT-HL RSL History

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration,


3EM23954AHAA, DLP-122 for more details
4 4 33
NE Operation Alarm Monitor
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 4 Page 33

5 MPT-HL RSL History

5.1 RSL History


The data includes local and remote:

TX/RX power
HBER alarm status
RPS and TPS status
identifiers for both local receiver and far-end transmitter

Each recorded log is stamped with the appropriate date and time
The log buffer is capable of storing 10,000 events
The RSL log data is not cleared when the controller is rebooted
The RSL log event storage contains the latest measured data
System monitors RSL data every 100 ms
System logs RSL data when there is a 2 dB change in any of the data
values, or change of alarms and switch status
Data resolution captures the key characteristics of a 50dB/s fade
MPT-HL automatically collects the data
The WT PM Tool is used to view the data in both online or offline mode
(not connected to NE)

4 4 34
NE Operation Alarm Monitor
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 4 Page 34

5 MPT-HL RSL History

5.1 RSL History [cont.]

4 4 35
NE Operation Alarm Monitor
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

View RSL history online:


Start Supervision of 9500 MPR
Click on the WTPMS on the NETO window and log into the 9500 MPR
In the side bar click on RSL History
Select appropriate MPT-HL
Click on Stopped Icon to Start transfer of RSL History to the PM Tool

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 4 Page 35

5 MPT-HL RSL History

5.2 View RSL History - Online


3

Click Stopped to start


data download

Select RSL History


Indicates download
in progress

Select MPTHL

4 4 36
NE Operation Alarm Monitor
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 4 Page 36

5 MPT-HL RSL History

5.2 View RSL History - Online [cont.]

Once the data has been retrieved from the


MPT-HL, user can apply different views, including
removing items or zooming in on the graph view

4 4 37
NE Operation Alarm Monitor
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 4 Page 37

5 MPT-HL RSL History

5.2 View RSL History - Online [cont.]


Ability to split
Working and
Protect RSL

4 4 38
NE Operation Alarm Monitor
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 4 Page 38

5 MPT-HL RSL History

5.2 View RSL History - Online [cont.]

User can
select what
data they
want to see
in the RSL
History

4 4 39
NE Operation Alarm Monitor
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 4 Page 39

5 MPT-HL RSL History

5.2 View RSL History - Online [cont.]

Zoom IN
or OUT

4 4 40
NE Operation Alarm Monitor
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 4 Page 40

5 MPT-HL RSL History

5.2 View RSL History - Online [cont.]

To save the file to view in Off-line mode:


Click on the Floppy Disk Icon
User will be prompted to provide a file name /description

4 4 41
NE Operation Alarm Monitor
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 4 Page 41

5 MPT-HL RSL History

5.3 View RSL History - Offline


The RSL history file can be viewed when not connected to the NE

4 4 42
NE Operation Alarm Monitor
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

View RSL history online:


Once a RSL History file has been saved, it can be viewed when Not connected to NE
On the Desk top, there is an icon for WT Performance Suite - OfflLine mode
Once started, user will be prompted with what file to view
The file name begins with the IP address of the NE and then the description user gave when saving in

the online mode

User can view data just like in On-line mode at this point

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 4 Page 42

Module summary
Recognize the meaning of Status and Alarm LEDs
Find MPT-HL alarm display using Equipment Menu
Find alarm display using Diagnosis Menu
Find alarm display using Alarm Monitor
List some causes of MPT-HL alarms
List details of an alarm
MPT-HL RSL history

4 4 43
NE Operation Alarm Monitor
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 4 Page 43

End of module
Alarm Monitor

4 4 44
NE Operation Alarm Monitor
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 4 Page 44

Do not delete this graphic elements in here:

Section 4
NE Operation
Module 5
Remove Cross Connections
TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio)


Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)
TWT42013 Edition 1.1

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent @@YEAR

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 5 Page 1

Blank page

452
NE Operation Remove Cross Connections

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)
Document
History

Edition

Date

This page is left blank intentionally


Author
Remarks

01

2007-08-28

Robinson, Ken

First edition

2.01

2010-07-30

Moehlenkamp, John

Revised to release 2.01

2.02

2010-11-30

Moehlenkamp, John

Revised to release 2.02

3.0

2001-02-28

Moehlenkamp, John

Revised to release 3.0

3.01

2011-06-29

Moehlenkamp, John

Revised to release 3.01

3.02

2011-11-15

Moehlenkamp, John

Updated format and revised to release 3.02

3.03

2012-02-07

Moehlenkamp, John

Revised to release 3.03

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 5 Page 2

Module objectives
Upon completion of this module, you should be able to:

Remove
Remove
Remove
Remove

DS1 cross-connections
DS3 cross-connections
Ethernet cross-connections
radio cross-connections

453
NE Operation Remove Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 5 Page 3

Module objectives [cont.]

454
NE Operation Remove Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

This page is left blank intentionally

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 5 Page 4

Table of Contents
Switch to notes view!
1 Removing DS1 Cross-Connections
1.1 Removing DS1 Cross-Connections
2 Removing DS3 Cross-Connections
2.1 Removing DS3 Cross-Connections
3 Removing Ethernet Cross-Connections
3.1 Removing Ethernet Cross-Connections
4 Removing Radio Cross-Connections
4.1 Removing Radio Cross-Connections

455
NE Operation Remove Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03

Page
7
8
15
16
23
24
31
32

Table of Contents [cont.]


Switch to notes view!

456
NE Operation Remove Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

This page is left blank intentionally

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03

1 Removing DS1 Cross-Connections

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration,


3EM23954AHAA, DLP-126 for more details
457
NE Operation Remove Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 5 Page 7

1 Removing DS1 Cross-Connections

1.1 Removing DS1 Cross-Connections

458
NE Operation Remove Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 5 Page 8

Double-click on crossconnection

1 Removing DS1 Cross-Connections

1.1 Removing DS1 Cross-Connections [cont.]

Port connection
dialog box opens

459
NE Operation Remove Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 5 Page 9

1 Removing DS1 Cross-Connections

1.1 Removing DS1 Cross-Connections [cont.]

2
3

4 5 10
NE Operation Remove Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

Uncheck port numbers


Click OK

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 5 Page 10

1 Removing DS1 Cross-Connections

1.1 Removing DS1 Cross-Connections [cont.]

Color of connectors may


change as appropriate

If all ports are unchecked,


cross-connection line disappears

4 5 11
NE Operation Remove Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

Click Apply to complete


the cross-connect removal

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 5 Page 11

Blank page
Switch to notes view!

4 5 12

This page intentionally left blank

NE Operation Remove Cross Connections


9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 5 Page 12

Exercise

Lab Exercise 13
Remove DS1 Cross-Connections

Time allowed:

4 5 13
NE Operation Remove Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 5 Page 13

Blank page
Switch to notes view!

4 5 14

This page intentionally left blank

NE Operation Remove Cross Connections


9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 5 Page 14

2 Removing DS3 Cross-Connections

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration,


3EM23954AHAA, DLP-126 for more details
4 5 15
NE Operation Remove Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 5 Page 15

2 Removing DS3 Cross-Connections

2.1 Removing DS3 Cross-Connections

4 5 16
NE Operation Remove Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 5 Page 16

Double-click on crossconnection

2 Removing DS3 Cross-Connections

2.1 Removing DS3 Cross-Connections [cont.]

Port connection
dialog box opens

4 5 17
NE Operation Remove Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 5 Page 17

2 Removing DS3 Cross-Connections

2.1 Removing DS3 Cross-Connections [cont.]

2
3

4 5 18
NE Operation Remove Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

Uncheck port numbers


Click OK

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 5 Page 18

2 Removing DS3 Cross-Connections

2.1 Removing DS3 Cross-Connections [cont.]

Color of connectors may


change as appropriate

If all ports are unchecked,


cross-connection line disappears

4 5 19
NE Operation Remove Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

Click Apply to complete


the cross-connect removal

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 5 Page 19

Blank page
Switch to notes view!

4 5 20

This page intentionally left blank

NE Operation Remove Cross Connections


9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 5 Page 20

Exercise

Lab Exercise 14
Remove DS3 Cross-Connections

Time allowed:

4 5 21
NE Operation Remove Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 5 Page 21

Blank page
Switch to notes view!

4 5 22

This page intentionally left blank

NE Operation Remove Cross Connections


9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 5 Page 22

3 Removing Ethernet Cross-Connections

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration,


3EM23954AHAA, DLP-126 for more details
4 5 23
NE Operation Remove Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 5 Page 23

3 Removing Ethernet Cross-Connections

3.1 Removing Ethernet Cross-Connections

4 5 24
NE Operation Remove Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 5 Page 24

Double-click on crossconnection

3 Removing Ethernet Cross-Connections

3.1 Removing Ethernet Cross-Connections [cont.]

Flow ID dialog
box opens

4 5 25
NE Operation Remove Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 5 Page 25

3 Removing Ethernet Cross-Connections

3.1 Removing Ethernet Cross-Connections [cont.]

2
3

4 5 26
NE Operation Remove Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

Uncheck Flow ID
Click OK

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 5 Page 26

3 Removing Ethernet Cross-Connections

3.1 Removing Ethernet Cross-Connections [cont.]

Color of connectors may


change as appropriate

If all ports are unchecked,


cross-connection line disappears

4 5 27
NE Operation Remove Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

Click Apply to complete


the cross-connect removal

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 5 Page 27

Blank page
Switch to notes view!

4 5 28

This page intentionally left blank

NE Operation Remove Cross Connections


9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 5 Page 28

Exercise

Lab Exercise 15
Remove Ethernet Cross-Connections

Time allowed:

4 5 29
NE Operation Remove Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 5 Page 29

Blank page
Switch to notes view!

4 5 30

This page intentionally left blank

NE Operation Remove Cross Connections


9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 5 Page 30

4 Removing Radio Cross-Connections

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration,


3EM23954AHAA, DLP-126 for more details
4 5 31
NE Operation Remove Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 5 Page 31

4 Removing Radio Cross-Connections

4.1 Removing Radio Cross-Connections

4 5 32
NE Operation Remove Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 5 Page 32

Double-click on crossconnection

4 Removing Radio Cross-Connections

4.1 Removing Radio Cross-Connections [cont.]

Flow ID dialog
box opens

4 5 33
NE Operation Remove Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 5 Page 33

4 Removing Radio Cross-Connections

4.1 Removing Radio Cross-Connections [cont.]

2
3

4 5 34
NE Operation Remove Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

Uncheck Flow ID
Click OK

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 5 Page 34

4 Removing Radio Cross-Connections

4.1 Removing Radio Cross-Connections [cont.]

Color of connectors may


change as appropriate

If all ports are unchecked,


cross-connection line disappears

4 5 35
NE Operation Remove Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

Click Apply to complete


the cross-connect removal

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 5 Page 35

Blank page
Switch to notes view!

4 5 36

This page intentionally left blank

NE Operation Remove Cross Connections


9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 5 Page 36

Exercise

Lab Exercise 16
Remove Radio Cross-Connections

Time allowed:

4 5 37
NE Operation Remove Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 5 Page 37

Blank page
Switch to notes view!

4 5 38

This page intentionally left blank

NE Operation Remove Cross Connections


9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 5 Page 38

Module summary
Removing
Removing
Removing
Removing

DS1 cross-connections
DS3 cross-connections
Ethernet cross-connections
radio cross-connections

4 5 39
NE Operation Remove Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 5 Page 39

End of module
Remove Cross Connections

4 5 40
NE Operation Remove Cross Connections
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 5 Page 40

Do not delete this graphic elements in here:

Section 4
NE Operation
Module 6
Browser Interface
TWT42013-11 Edition 3.03

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio)


Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)
TWT42013 Edition 1.1

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent @@YEAR

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-11 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 6 Page 1

Blank page

Document History
Edition

Date

Author

Remarks

01

2007-07-30

External Consultant

First edition

2008-09-30

Fisher, Sheldon

Convert to ANSI version for NAR

01.10
01.20

462

NE Operation Browser Interface


9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

2009-01-21

Fisher, Sheldon

Revisions after Pilot Class

01.31

2009-03-05

This page
is left blank intentionally
Fisher,
Sheldon
Final Revisions

01.40

2009-06-23

Robinson, Ken

Revised to release 2.0

01.41

2009-07-27

Robinson, Ken

Revised after review

2.01

2010-07-30

Moehlenkamp, John

Revised to release 2.01

2.02

2010-11-30

Moehlenkamp, John

Revised to release 2.02

3.0

2011-02-28

Moehlenkamp, John

Revised to release 3.0

3.01

2011-06-29

Moehlenkamp, John

Revised to release 3.01

3.02

2011-11-15

Moehlenkamp, John

Updated format and revised to release 3.02

3.03

2012-02-07

Moehlenkamp, John

Revised to release 3.03

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-11 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 6 Page 2

Module objectives
Upon completion of this module, you should be able to connect to a 9500
MPR-A using a Web browser:

Check Date and Time Settings


Print Configuration Information
License Information
Check DHCP status

463
NE Operation Browser Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-11 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 6 Page 3

Module objectives [cont.]

464
NE Operation Browser Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

This page is left blank intentionally

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-11 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 6 Page 4

Table of Contents
Switch to notes view!
1 Browser Interface
1.1 Browser Interface
1.2 Browser Interface - Logon
1.3 Browser Interface - Alarm Screen
1.4 Browser Interface - Date & Time Setting
1.5 Browser Interface - Date & Time NTP Enabled
1.6 Browser Interface - Configuration Info
1.7 Browser Interface - DHCP
1.8 Browser Interface - License Info
1.9 Community Strings Setting
1.10 Browser Interface - Logout

465
NE Operation Browser Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-11 Edition 3.03

Page
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
15
16
17
18

Table of Contents [cont.]


Switch to notes view!

466
NE Operation Browser Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

This page is left blank intentionally

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-11 Edition 3.03

1 Browser Interface

467
NE Operation Browser Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-11 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 6 Page 7

1 Browser Interface

1.1 Browser Interface


1. Be sure your computer is connected to a network that is connected to
the Craft Port (MGMT Port)
2. Open a Web browser
3. Enter the IP address of the 9500 MPR and click Go or press Enter
Example:

468
NE Operation Browser Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

This is another method of monitoring alarms.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-11 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 6 Page 8

1 Browser Interface

1.2 Browser Interface - Logon

1 Enter logon username

2 Enter logon password

3 Click OK

469
NE Operation Browser Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Your 9500 MPR username and password

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-11 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 6 Page 9

1 Browser Interface

1.3 Browser Interface - Alarm Screen

Main
Menu

Detail Area

4 6 10
NE Operation Browser Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-11 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 6 Page 10

1 Browser Interface

1.4 Browser Interface - Date & Time Setting

1 Click Date & Time Setting

2 Two methods to
update NE time

2 Click Apply to NE

4 6 11
NE Operation Browser Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-11 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 6 Page 11

1 Browser Interface

1.5 Browser Interface - Date & Time NTP Enabled

4 6 12
NE Operation Browser Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-11 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 6 Page 12

1 Browser Interface

1.6 Browser Interface - Configuration Info

1 Click Configuration Info

2 Click Open or Save

4 6 13
NE Operation Browser Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-11 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 6 Page 13

1 Browser Interface

1.6 Browser Interface - Configuration Info [cont.]

4 6 14
NE Operation Browser Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-11 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 6 Page 14

1 Browser Interface

1.7 Browser Interface - DHCP

1 Click DHCP Setting

2 Click Enable or
Disable DHCP

4 6 15
NE Operation Browser Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a client/server protocol that automatically provides an
Internet Protocol (IP) host with its IP address and other related configuration information such as the
subnet mask and default gateway.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-11 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 6 Page 15

1 Browser Interface

1.8 Browser Interface - License Info

Click License Info

4 6 16
NE Operation Browser Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-11 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 6 Page 16

1 Browser Interface

1.9 Community Strings Setting

4 6 17
NE Operation Browser Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

The Community String (CS) acts like a password to control access to an NE. It defines what
community of people can access the NE.
Two community strings are supported:
Get CS
Default value: public
Both Read and Read-Write objects operate in Read mode only
Set CS
Default value: private
Both Read and Read-Write objects operate in their respective modes
NOTE: Provisioning new Community Strings will cause a loss of communication on ALL NEtO session
currently active.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-11 Edition 3.03

1 Browser Interface

1.10 Browser Interface - Logout

Click Logout to exit

4 6 18
NE Operation Browser Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-11 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 6 Page 18

Exercise

Lab Exercise 17
Browser Interface

Time allowed:

4 6 19
NE Operation Browser Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-11 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 6 Page 19

Blank page
Switch to notes view!

4 6 20

This page intentionally left blank

NE Operation Browser Interface


9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-11 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 6 Page 20

Module summary
Connecting to a 9500 MPR-A using a Web browser
Date and Time Settings
Configuration Information
License Information
DHCP status

4 6 21
NE Operation Browser Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-11 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 6 Page 21

End of module
Browser Interface

4 6 22
NE Operation Browser Interface
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-11 Edition 3.03
Section 4 Module 6 Page 22

Do not delete this graphic elements in here:

Section 5
Course
Module 1
Summary

TWT42013-12 Edition 3.03

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio)


Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)
TWT42013 Edition 1.1

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent @@YEAR

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-12 Edition 3.03
Section 5 Module 1 Page 1

Blank page

512
Course Summary
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Document History

This
page is left blank intentionally
Author
Remarks

Edition

Date

01.10

2008-09-30

Fisher, Sheldon

Added to ANSI version for NAR

1.21

2009-01-23

Fisher, Sheldon

Revise to R1.1

01.31

2009-03-05

Fisher, Sheldon

Final Revisions

01.41

2009-07-02

Robinson, Ken

Revised after R2.00 review

2.01

2010-07-30

Moehlenkamp, John

Revised to release 2.01

2.02

2010-11-30

Moehlenkamp, John

Revised to release 2.02

3.0

2011-01-25

Moehlenkamp, John

Revised to release 3.0

3.01

2011-06-29

Moehlenkamp, John

Revised to release 3.01

3.02

2011-11-15

Moehlenkamp, John

Updated format and revised to release 3.02

3.03

2012-02-07

Moehlenkamp, John

Revised to release 3.03

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-12 Edition 3.03
Section 5 Module 1 Page 2

Course objectives
Upon completion of this course, you should be able to:

Describe the basic concepts of the 9500 MPR-A


Respond to and manage alarm conditions
Monitor system and application status
Maintain 9500 MPR-A hardware and software

513
Course Summary
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-12 Edition 3.03
Section 5 Module 1 Page 3

Course objectives [cont.]

514
Course Summary
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

This page is left blank intentionally

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-12 Edition 3.03
Section 5 Module 1 Page 4

Course outline
We have covered the following topics in this course:
Section 1. Course Overview
y Module 1. Course Overview

Section 2. Product
y Module 1. Product Overview

Section 3. Product Architecture


y Module 1. MSS
y Module 2. MPT-HL
y Module 3. Outdoor Units

Section 4. Operation
y
y
y
y
y
y

Module
Module
Module
Module
Module
Module

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

GUI
Cross-Connections
Diagnosis and Performance Monitoring
Alarm Monitor/RSL History
Remove Cross-Connections
Browser

Section 5. Course
y Module 1. Summary
515
Course Summary
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-12 Edition 3.03
Section 5 Module 1 Page 5

End of module
Summary

516
Course Summary
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-12 Edition 3.03
Section 5 Module 1 Page 6

Do not delete this graphic elements in here:

Section 6
Terms
Module 1
Acronyms

TWT42013-13 Edition 3.03

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio)


Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)
TWT42013 Edition 1.1

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent @@YEAR

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-13 Edition 3.03
Section 6 Module 1 Page 1

Blank page

Document History
Edition

Date

612

Author

Remarks
COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Acronyms
3.1 Terms
2011-07-04
Moehlenkamp,
John
9500 MPR (Microwave
Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance
R3.03 (ANSI)

First edition

3.2

2011-11-14

Moehlenkamp,
Updated format and revised to release 3.02
This
page is leftJohn
blank intentionally

3.3

2012-02-07

Moehlenkamp, John

Revised to release 3.03

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-13 Edition 3.03
Section 6 Module 1 Page 2

Abbreviations and acronyms


Switch to notes view!

A
AIS

Alarm Indication Signal

AMI

Alternating Mark Inversion

ANSI

American National Standards Institute

APT

Active Problem Table

ASAP

Alarm Severity Assignment Profile

ASIC

Application Specific Integrated Circuit

ATPC

Automatic Transmit Power Control

AVC

Attribute Value Change

B
BBE

Background Block Error

BER

Bit Error Rate

BIP

Bit Interleaved Parity

613

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Terms Acronyms

Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)


CAS9500 MPR (MicrowaveChannel
Associated Signaling

CD

Current Data

CES

Circuit Emulation Service

CESoETH

Circuit Emulation Service over Ethernet

CESoP

Circuit Emulation Services over Packet

CFA

Carrier Failure Alarm

CLA

Common Loss Alarm

CRC

Cyclic Redundancy Check

CRU

Clock Reference Unit

CSM

Control and Switching Module (Core module)

CSM-E

Enhanced Control and Switching Module (Core module)

CT

Craft Terminal

D
DC

Direct Current

DL

Data Link

DS

Differentiated Services

DS1

Digital Signal Level 1

DS3

Digital Signal Level 3

DSCP

Differentiated Services Code Point

DWRR

Deficient Waited round Robin


Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TWT42013-13 Edition 3.03
Section 6 Module 1 Page 3

Abbreviations and acronyms [cont.]


Switch to notes view!

E
EAS

Ethernet Access Switch Module

EC

Equipment Controller

ECID

Emulation Identification

ECT

Equipment Craft Terminal

EFC

Ethernet Flow Control

EFD

Event Forwarding Discriminator

EOW

Engineering Order Wire

EPS

Equipment Protection Switch

ES

Errored Second

ESMC

Ethernet Synchronization Messaging Channel

ETH

Ethernet

ETSI

European Telecommunications Standards Institute

EW

Early Warning

F
F

614

Framing

Terms Acronyms
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

FAS

Frame Alignment Signal

FCS

Frame Check Sequence

FD

Frequency Diversity

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

FE

Fast Ethernet

FEC

Forward Error Correction

FPGA

Field Programmable Gate Array

G
GFP

Generic Frame Protocol

GigE

Gigabit Ethernet

GNE

Gateway Network Element

GPIO

General Purpose I/O

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-13 Edition 3.03
Section 6 Module 1 Page 4

Abbreviations and acronyms [cont.]


Switch to notes view!

H
HBER

High Bit Error Ratio

HD

History Data

HDB3

High Density order 3 Bipolar encoding

HET

Hetero frequency

HQP

High Queue Preempt

HS

Hitless Switch

HSB

Hot Standby

HSDPA

High Speed Data Packet Access

HSSD

Hot-Standby Space Diversity

HW

Hardware

I
IDU

Indoor Unit

ILM

Infomodel Level Management

IM
IP

Information Model
615

Internet Protocol

Terms Acronyms
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

ISAM

Indexed Sequential Access Method

ISPB

Intra Shelf Parallel Switching

IWF

Interworking Function

J
JA

Jitter Attenuator

JTAG

Joint Test Action Group

JUSM

Java User-based Security Model

L
LAN

Local Area Network

LAPD

Link Access Procedure on D-channel

LBER

Low Bit Error Ration

LIM

Link Identifier Mismatch

LIU

Line Interface Unit

LOF

Loss Of Frame

LOS

Loss Of Signal
Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TWT42013-13 Edition 3.03
Section 6 Module 1 Page 5

Abbreviations and acronyms [cont.]


Switch to notes view!

M
MAC

Medium Access Control

MAU

Medium Attachment Unit

MCF

Message Communication Function

MCT

Microwave Craft Terminal

MEF8

Metro Ethernet Forum

MEN

Metro Ethernet Network

MIB

Management Information Base

MOD300

Radio Interface Module

MOD300EN Enhanced Radio Interface Module


MPR

Microwave Packet Radio

MPT

Microwave Packet Transport

MPT-HC

Microwave Packet Transport High Capacity

MPT-HL

Microwave Packet Transport High Power, Long Haul

MPT-MC

Microwave Packet Transport Medium Capacity

MRTIE

Maximum Relative Time Interval Error

MSOH

Multiple Section Overhead

MSS
616

Microwave Service Switch

Terms Acronyms
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

MTIE

Maximum Time Interval Error

MXC

Microwave Cross Connect

N
NE

Network Element

NEtO

Network Element Overview

NMS

Network Management System

NNI

Network Node Interface

NRZ

Not Return to Zero

NSA

Not Service Affecting

NTP

Network Time Protocol

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-13 Edition 3.03
Section 6 Module 1 Page 6

Abbreviations and acronyms [cont.]


Switch to notes view!

O
OC

ODU Controller

ODU

Outdoor Unit

ODU300

Outdoor Unit 300

OFS

Out of Frame Second

OH

Overhead

OMS

Operations Management System

OOF

Out Of Frame

OS

Operation System

OSPF

Open Short Path First

P
P2E3DS3

DS3 Module

P32E1DS1 DS1 Module


PDH

Plesyochronous Digital Hierarchy

PDU

Protocol Data Unit

PDV
617

Packet Delay Variation

Terms Acronyms
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

PFoE

Power Feed over Ethernet

PLM

Payload Mismatch

PLM

Physical Level management

PM

Performance Monitoring

PMMF

Physical Machine Management Function

PNU

Packet Node Unit

PPM

Part Per Million

PPP

Point-to-Point Protocol

PPPoE

Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet

PRBS

Pseudo Random Binary Sequence

PRS

Clock Primary Reference Source Clock

PSN

Packet Switched Network

PSU

Power Supply Unit

PTU

Packet Transport Unit

PWE3

Pseudowire emulation edge to edge

Q
QAS

Quadrature Amplitude Modulation

QoS

Quality of Service

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-13 Edition 3.03
Section 6 Module 1 Page 7

Abbreviations and acronyms [cont.]


Switch to notes view!

R
R99

Original standard for UMTS WCDMA based network

RAI

Remote Alarm Indication

RDI

Remote Defect Indication

REI

Remote Error Indication

RFC

Remote Frequency Control

RI

Remote Inventory

RPS

Radio Protection Switching

RSOH

Regenerator Section Over-Head

RSL

Receive Signal Level

RSSI

Remote Signal Strength Indication

RTPC

Remote Transmit Power Control

RTU

Right To Use

RU

Rack Unit

S
SA 6 1 8

Service Affecting

Terms Acronyms
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

SD

Space Diversity

SDH

Synchronous Digital Hierarchy

SerDes

Serializer/Deserializer

SES

Severely Errored Second

SF

Signal Fail

SFP

Small form-factor pluggable transceiver

SGMII

Serial Gigabit Media Independent Interface

SNMP

Simple Network Management Protocol

SP

Spare

SP

Strict Priority

SPI

Serial Peripheral Interface

SW

Software

SWP

Software Package

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-13 Edition 3.03
Section 6 Module 1 Page 8

Abbreviations and acronyms [cont.]


Switch to notes view!

T
TBI

Ten Bit Interface

TCA

Threshold Crossing Alarm

TCO

Total Cost of Ownership

TD

Threshold Data

TDEV

Time Deviation

TDF

Total Discarded Frames

TDM

Time Division Multiplexed

TDM2ETH

Time Division Multiplexed To Ethernet

TDM2TDM Time Division Multiplexed To Time Division Multiplexed


TIM

Trace Identifier Mismatch

TMN

Telecommunication Management Network

TPS

Transmit Protection Switching

TRCF

Total Received Correct Frames

TRCO

Total Received Correct Octets

TRSEF

Total Received Service Errored Frames

TS

Time Slot

TSM
619

Transmission Systems Manager


COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Terms Acronyms
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

TTF

Total Transmitted Frames

TTO

Total Transmitted Octets

TTP

Trail Termination Point

U
UAS

UnAvailable Second

UAT

UnAvailable Time

UI

Unit Interval

UMTS

Universal Mobile Telecommunications System

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-13 Edition 3.03
Section 6 Module 1 Page 9

Abbreviations and acronyms [cont.]


Switch to notes view!

V
VC-n

Virtual Container - n

VLAN

Virtual Local Area Network

VMMF

Virtual Machine Management Function

W
WCDMA

Wideband Code Division Multiple Access

WebEML

Web Element Manager Layer

WiMAX

Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access

WK

Working

WRR

Weighted Round Robin

WT

Wireless Transmission

WTPM

Wireless Transmission Performance Monitoring

X
XPIC
6 1 10

Cross-Polarized InterferenceCOPYRIGHT
Cancellation
ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Terms Acronyms
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

Z
ZBTSI

Zero Byte Time Slot Interchange

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-13 Edition 3.03
Section 6 Module 1 Page 10

Blank Page
Switch to notes view!

6 1 11

This page intentionally left blank

Terms Acronyms
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-13 Edition 3.03
Section 6 Module 1 Page 11

End of module
Acronyms

6 1 12
Terms Acronyms
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-13 Edition 3.03
Section 6 Module 1 Page 12

Do not delete this graphic elements in here:

Section 7
Exercises
Module 1
Labs

TWT42013-14 Edition 3.03

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio)


Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)
TWT42013 Edition 1.1

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent @@YEAR

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-14 Edition 3.03
Section 7 Module 1 Page 1

Blank page

712

Exercises Labs
Edition
Date
Author
9500 MPR (Microwave
Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance
R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Remarks

01

2008-10-21

Fisher,
Sheldon
First edition
This
page
is left blank intentionally

1.21

2008-11-4

Fisher, Sheldon

Updated

1.30

2009-01-30

Fisher, Sheldon

Update to R1.1

1.41

2009-07-02

Robinson, Ken

Update to release 2.0

2.01

2010-07-30

Moehlenkamp, John

Update to release 2.01

2.02

2010-11-30

Moehlenkamp, John

Update to release 2.02

3.0

2011-01-25

Moehlenkamp, John

Revised to release 3.0

3.01

2011-06-29

Moehlenkamp, John

Revised to release 3.01

3.02

2011-11-15

Moehlenkamp, John

Updated format and revised to release 3.02

3.03

2012-02-07

Moehlenkamp, John

Revised to release 3.03

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-14 Edition 3.03
Section 7 Module 1 Page 2

9500 MPR-A R3.03 Lab Assignments (Plano Campus)

User ID

Student1

Student2

Student3

Student4

Student5

Student6

Student7

Student8

Password

packet

packet

packet

packet

packet

packet

packet

packet

NE

IP Address

NE

IP Address

NE

IP Address

Train01

172.22.132.215

Train02

172.22.132.150

Train03

172.22.132.

Student 1
DS1 Port
Settings

NE

Student 2
Port #

Flow ID

DS1 Port
Settings

Port A

Port A

Port B

Port B

Port C

Port C

DS3 Port
Settings
Port A

NE

Port #

713
Exercises Labs
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

Flow ID

DS3 Port
Settings

Port C

Port C
Port #

Flow ID

NE

Port #

Flow ID

NE

Port #

Flow ID

Port A
Port B

NE

Port #

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Port B

Eth Port
Settings

NE

Flow ID

Eth Port
Settings
Port E

Port E
Student 3
DS1 Port
Settings

NE

Student 4
Port #

Flow ID

DS1 Port
Settings

Port A

Port A

Port B

Port B

Port C

Port C

DS3 Port
Settings

NE

Port #

Flow ID

DS3 Port
Settings

Port A

Port A

Port B

Port B

Port C

Port C

Eth Port
Settings
Port E

NE

Port #

Flow ID

Eth Port
Settings

NE

Port #

Flow ID

NE

Port #

Flow ID

NE

Port #

Flow ID

Port E
Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TWT42013-14 Edition 3.03
Section 7 Module 1 Page 3

9500 MPR-A R3.03 Lab Assignments (Plano Campus) [cont.]

Student 5
DS1 Port
Settings

NE

Student 6
Port #

Flow ID

DS1 Port
Settings

Port A

Port A

Port B

Port B

Port C

Port C

DS3 Port
Settings

NE

Port #

Flow ID

DS3 Port
Settings

Port A

Port A

Port B

Port B

Port C

Port C

Eth Port
Settings
714
Port E

NE

Port #

Exercises Labs
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

Flow ID

Eth Port
Settings

NE

Port #

Flow ID

NE

Port #

Flow ID

NE

Port #

Flow ID

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Port E

Student 7
DS1 Port
Settings

NE

Student 8
Port #

Flow ID

DS1 Port
Settings

Port A

Port A

Port B

Port B

Port C

Port C

DS3 Port
Settings

NE

Port #

Flow ID

DS3 Port
Settings

Port A

Port A

Port B

Port B

Port C

Port C

Eth Port
Settings
Port E

NE

Port #

Flow ID

Eth Port
Settings

NE

Port #

Flow ID

NE

Port #

Flow ID

NE

Port #

Flow ID

Port E

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-14 Edition 3.03
Section 7 Module 1 Page 4

9500 MPR-A R3.03 Lab Assignments (On Site)


User ID

Student1

Student2

Student3

Student4

Student5

Student6

Student7

Student8

Password

packet

packet

packet

packet

packet

packet

packet

packet

NE

IP Address

NE

IP Address

NE

Student 1
DS1 Port
Settings

NE

Student 2
Port #

Flow ID

DS1 Port
Settings

Port A

Port A

Port B

Port B

Port C

Port C

DS3 Port
Settings
Port A

NE

Port #

715
Exercises Labs
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

Flow ID

DS3 Port
Settings

Port C

Port C
Port #

Port #

Flow ID

NE

Port #

Flow ID

NE

Port #

Flow ID

Port A
Port B

NE

NE

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Port B

Eth Port
Settings

Flow ID

Eth Port
Settings
Port E

Port E
Student 3
DS1 Port
Settings

NE

Student 4
Port #

Flow ID

DS1 Port
Settings

Port A

Port A

Port B

Port B

Port C

Port C

DS3 Port
Settings

NE

Port #

Flow ID

DS3 Port
Settings

Port A

Port A

Port B

Port B

Port C

Port C

Eth Port
Settings
Port E

IP Address

NE

Port #

Flow ID

Eth Port
Settings

NE

Port #

Flow ID

NE

Port #

Flow ID

NE

Port #

Flow ID

Port E
Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TWT42013-14 Edition 3.03
Section 7 Module 1 Page 5

9500 MPR-A R3.03 Lab Assignments (On Site) [cont.]

Student 5
DS1 Port
Settings

NE

Student 6
Port #

Flow ID

DS1 Port
Settings

Port A

Port A

Port B

Port B

Port C

Port C

DS3 Port
Settings

NE

Port #

Flow ID

DS3 Port
Settings

Port A

Port A

Port B

Port B

Port C

Port #

Flow ID

NE

Port #

Flow ID

NE

Port #

Flow ID

Port C

716
Exercises Labs
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

Eth Port
Settings

NE

NE

Port #

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Flow ID

Eth Port
Settings
Port E

Port E

Student 7
DS1 Port
Settings

NE

Student 8
Port #

Flow ID

DS1 Port
Settings

Port A

Port A

Port B

Port B

Port C

Port C

DS3 Port
Settings

NE

Port #

Flow ID

DS3 Port
Settings

Port A

Port A

Port B

Port B

Port C

Port C

Eth Port
Settings
Port E

NE

Port #

Flow ID

Eth Port
Settings

NE

Port #

Flow ID

NE

Port #

Flow ID

NE

Port #

Flow ID

Port E

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-14 Edition 3.03
Section 7 Module 1 Page 6

Lab Exercise 1 - 9500 MPR Hardware Orientation

Go to the assigned 9500 MPR-A radio rack in the Training Lab.


1. Complete the following table. Indicate the type of card in each slot, and its function.

Slot

Type of Card

Active

Standby

Slot

Type of Card

Active

Standby

2. Which SFP connection on the EAS card is connected to the Main MPT?

________________________

3. Which SFP connection on the EAS card is connected to the Spare MPT?

_______________________

717
Exercises Labs
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

4. Are there any other SFP connections on the EAS card?

_____________________________________

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-14 Edition 3.03
Section 7 Module 1 Page 7

Lab Exercise 2 - Operator GUI - NEtO Overview


Reference: MSS HW Hardware Module
Preparation: Logon to Microsoft Windows on your class computer using your instructor-assigned User ID
and Password.
1. Activate the NEtO application by clicking on the icon on the desktop.
2. Enter the assigned IP address for your group and click on OK.
3. Complete the following information:

Site Name:
Site Location:
Alarm

Color

Number

Critical
Major
Minor
718
Exercises Labs
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Warning

Indeterminate
4. Click on Show to start supervision. If the supervision does not start, record the error message received.

5. When the Login dialog box opens, use the following to log on to the MSS:

Logon:
Password:
When the NE Main View opens, keep it open for the next exercise.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-14 Edition 3.03
Section 7 Module 1 Page 8

Lab Exercise 3 - Operator GUI - NE Main View


Reference: MSS HW Hardware Module
Preparation
1. You must be logged into Microsoft Windows on your class computer.

2. You must have the NEtO application running.


3. You must be logged onto the application and have the NE Main View open.
Compare the information in the Current Alarms table in Exercise #2 with the information in the Alarm
Severity Panel in the Main View. (sample shown at top of table). Complete the information in the
following table:

719

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

(sample Alarm Severity Panel)

Exercises Labs
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

CRI
Same

MAJ
Diff

Same

MIN
Diff

Same

WNG
Diff

Same

Diff

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-14 Edition 3.03
Section 7 Module 1 Page 9

IND
Same

Diff

Lab Exercise 3 - Operator GUI - NE Main View [cont.]


1.

Total the number of alarms shown in the Alarm Severity Panel: _____________

2.

Now total the number of alarms shown in the Domain Synthesis Panel:_______

3.

Is there a difference? __________________

Click on the Synchronization Tab. What type of synchronization is being used?


________________________________________________________________________
4.

Click on the Synchronization Source Tab.

5.

Click on the Protection Tab. Complete the following table:

Protection
Type

Slot

Port

7 1 10
Exercises Labs
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

6.

CH

Role

Status

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Return to the NE Main View for the next Exercise.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-14 Edition 3.03
Section 7 Module 1 Page 10

Command

Criteria

Lab Exercise 4 - NEtO Menus


Reference: MSS HW Hardware Module
Preparation
1. You must be logged into Microsoft Windows on your class computer.

2. You must have the NEtO application running.


3. You must be logged onto the application and have the NE Main View open.
Click on the Views Menu. Compare clicking on each of the last four selections of the
Menu with clicking on the Tabs in the Equipment view.
Click on the Configuration Menu.
1. What is the Local Configuration IP Address. _____________________________________
2. Click on Current Configuration. Answer the following questions:
a.

What is the TX frequency? _______________________________

1 11
b. 7What

c.
d.

is the status of the TMN RF MANAGEMENT port? _________________________

Exercises Labs
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

What is the status of DHCP? ______________________________


What is the configuration of the CSM-E? _________________________

Click on the SW Download Menu. Click on the SW Status selection.


1. Committed software
a. Which Bank is Committed?_____________________________________________
b. What is the software Version? __________________________________________
2. Standby software
c. Which Bank is Standby? ______________________________________________
d. What is the software Version? __________________________________________

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-14 Edition 3.03
Section 7 Module 1 Page 11

Lab Exercise 5 - MPT-HL and MOD300 Configuration


Determine MPT Provisioning
1. Select the MSS/MPT Dir#-Ch# in the Resource Tree area.
2. Determine if the selected name is highlighted in yellow.

___Yes __No

3. Determine if the selection is highlighted the MSS/MPT icon in blue.

___Yes __No

4. Double-click the blue MSS/MPT icon and the RF Settings screen should display.
5. List channel spacing
6. List modulation scheme
7. List the Rx RF Frequency

7 1 12
Exercises Labs
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-14 Edition 3.03
Section 7 Module 1 Page 12

Lab Exercise 5 - MPT-HL and MOD300 Configuration [cont]


MPT Direction and Channel
1. Select the MPT Dir#-Ch# in the Resource Tree area. The selected name will be highlighted in yellow.

This selection should also highlight the MSS/MPT icon in blue in the resource List Area.

2. Click Settings tab in Resource Detail area and complete the following:
a.

List the Equipment Type

b.

List the Protection scheme

7 1 13
Exercises Labs
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-14 Edition 3.03
Section 7 Module 1 Page 13

Lab Exercise 6 - Configure DS1 Ports


1.

You must be logged into Microsoft Windows on your class computer.

2.

You must have the NEtO application running.

3.

Configure the ports according to the following information:

Signal Mode
Framed ESF
4.

Service Profile
TDM2TDM

Line Coding
B8ZS

Check for any new alarms that have occurred because you configured the ports.

List them below:

Event Time

Probable Cause

7 1 14
Exercises Labs
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

Friendly Name

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Return to the NE Main View for the next Exercise.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-14 Edition 3.03
Section 7 Module 1 Page 14

Severity

Lab Exercise 7 - DS1 Cross-Connections


1.

You must be logged into Microsoft Windows on your class computer.

2.

You must have the NEtO application running.

3.

You must have the DS1, DS3, and Ethernet ports configured in Lab Exercises 6, 7. and 8.

4.

Click on the cross-connections icon to open the cross-connections screen.

5.

What are the colors of the connectors before you make the cross-connection?
DS1 ________________ Radio _____________

6.

Make the cross-connections as directed by the instructor.

7.

What are the colors of the connectors after you made the cross-connection?
DS1 ________________ Radio _____________

8.

What is the color of the cross-connection line?


7 1 15
________________________________________________________________________
Exercises Labs
COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

9.

List any new Alarms that have occurred as a result of making the cross-connections.

Event Time

Probable Cause

Friendly Name

Close the cross-connections screen and return to the NE Main View for the next Exercise.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-14 Edition 3.03
Section 7 Module 1 Page 15

Severity

Lab Exercise 8 - Configure DS3 Ports


1.

You must be logged into Microsoft Windows on your class computer.

2.

You must have the NEtO application running.

Configure the ports according to the following information:


Signal Mode
Framed

3.

Service Profile
TDM2TDM

Check for any new alarms that have occurred because you configured the ports.

List them below:


Event Time

Probable Cause

7 1 16
Exercises Labs
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

Friendly Name

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Return to the NE Main View for the next Exercise.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-14 Edition 3.03
Section 7 Module 1 Page 16

Severity

Lab Exercise 9 - DS3 Cross-Connections


1.

You must be logged into Microsoft Windows on your class computer.

2.

You must have the NEtO application running.

3.

You must have the DS1, DS3, and Ethernet ports configured in Lab Exercises 6, 7. and 8.

4.

Click on the cross-connections icon to open the cross-connections screen.

5.

What are the colors of the connectors before you make the cross-connection?
DS3 ________________ Radio _____________

6.

Make the cross-connections as directed by the instructor.

7.

What are the colors of the connectors after you made the cross-connection?
DS3 ________________ Radio _____________

8.

What is the color of the cross-connection line?


7 1 17
________________________________________________________________________
Exercises Labs
COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

List any new Alarms that have occurred as a result of making the cross-connections.

Event Time

Probable Cause

Friendly Name

Close the cross-connections screen and return to the NE Main View for the next Exercise.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-14 Edition 3.03
Section 7 Module 1 Page 17

Severity

Lab Exercise 10 - Configure Ethernet Port


1.

You must be logged into Microsoft Windows on your class computer.

2.

You must have the NEtO application running.

3.

You must have the DS1 ports configured in Lab Exercise # 5.

Configure the port according to the following information:


Port Status
Enabled

4.

Auto Negotiation Status


Enabled

Flow Control
Enabled

Check for any new alarms that have occurred because you configured the Port. List

them below:

Event Time

7 1 18

Probable Cause

Exercises Labs
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

Friendly Name

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Return to the NE Main View for the next Exercise.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-14 Edition 3.03
Section 7 Module 1 Page 18

Severity

Lab Exercise 11 - Ethernet Cross-Connections


1.

You must be logged into Microsoft Windows on your class computer.

2.

You must have the NEtO application running.

3.

You must have the DS1, DS3, and Ethernet ports configured in Lab Exercises 6, 7. and 8.

4.

Click on the cross-connections icon to open the cross-connections screen.

5.

What are the colors of the connectors before you make the cross-connection?
Ethernet ________________ Radio _____________

6.

Make the cross-connection as follows:


Event Time

7.

Probable Cause

Severity

What are the colors of the connectors after you made the cross-connection?
7 1 19

Ethernet ________________ Radio _____________

Exercises Labs
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

8.

Friendly Name

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

What is the color of the cross-connection line?

________________________________________________________________________
List any new Alarms that have occurred as a result of making the cross-connections.

Event Time

Probable Cause

Friendly Name

Close the cross-connections screen and return to the NE Main View for the next Exercise.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-14 Edition 3.03
Section 7 Module 1 Page 19

Severity

Lab Exercise 12 - Alarm Monitor


1.

You must be logged into Microsoft Windows on your class computer.

2.

You must have the NEtO application running.

3.

You must have the DS1, DS3, and Ethernet ports configured in Lab Exercises 6, 7. and 8.

4.

You must have made the DS1 cross-connections in Lab Exercise 9.

5.

Go to the Alarm Monitor.

6.

View all current alarms.

7.

View all current Major alarms.

8.

Double-click on one of the alarms to open the help screen.

7 1 20
Exercises Labs
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-14 Edition 3.03
Section 7 Module 1 Page 20

Lab Exercise 13 - Remove DS1 Cross-Connections


1.

You must be logged into Microsoft Windows on your class computer.

2.

You must have the NEtO application running.

3.

You must have the DS1, DS3, and Ethernet ports configured in Lab Exercises 6, 7. and 8.

4.

You must have made the DS1 cross-connections in Lab Exercise 9.

5.

Click on the cross-connections icon to open the cross-connections screen.

6.

Remove the cross-connections as directed by the instructor.

7.

What are the colors of the connectors before you make the cross-connection?
DS1 ________________ Radio _____________

8.

What are the colors of the connectors after you made the cross-connection?
DS1 ________________ Radio _____________
7 1 21

9.

Exercises Labs
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Did the cross-connection line disappear? Yes ____________ No _____________

10. If the cross-connection line disappeared, explain why that happened:

____________________________________________________________________________________
11. If the cross-connection line did not disappear, explain why it is still there:

____________________________________________________________________________________
12. List any new Alarms that have occurred as a result of removing the cross-connections.

Severity

Event Time

Entity

Probable Cause

13. Disable the DS1 ports you configured in Lab Exercise # 5.


14. Close the cross-connections screen and return to the NE Main View for the next Exercise.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-14 Edition 3.03
Section 7 Module 1 Page 21

Lab Exercise 14 - Remove DS3 Cross-Connections


1. You must be logged into Microsoft Windows on your class computer.
2. You must have the NEtO application running.
3. You must have the DS1, DS3, and Ethernet ports configured in Lab Exercises 6, 7. and 8.
4. You must have made the DS1 cross-connections in Lab Exercise 9.
Click on the cross-connections icon to open the cross-connections screen.
Remove the cross-connections as directed by the instructor.
What were the colors of the connectors before you made the cross-connection?
DS3 ________________ Radio _____________
What are the colors of the connectors after you made the cross-connection?
DS3 ________________ Radio _____________
Did the cross-connection line disappear? Yes ____________ No _____________
If the cross-connection line disappeared, explain why that happened:
________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
If the cross-connection line did not disappear, explain why it is still there:
________________________________________________________________________
7 1 22
________________________________________________________________________
Exercises Labs
COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

List any new Alarms that have occurred as a result of removing the cross-connections.

Severity

Event Time

Entity

Probable Cause

Disable the DS1 ports you configured in Lab Exercise # 5.


Close the cross-connections screen and return to the NE Main View for the next Exercise.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-14 Edition 3.03
Section 7 Module 1 Page 22

Lab Exercise 15 - Remove Ethernet Cross-Connection


1. You must be logged into Microsoft Windows on your class computer.
2. You must have the NEtO application running.
3. You must have the DS1, DS3, and Ethernet ports configured in Lab Exercises 6, 7. and 8.
4. You must have made the Ethernet cross-connections in Lab Exercise 11.
Click on the cross-connections icon to open the cross-connections screen.
Remove the cross-connections as directed by the instructor.
What were the colors of the connectors before you made the cross-connection?
Ethernet ________________ Radio _____________
What are the colors of the connectors after you made the cross-connection?
Ethernet ________________ Radio _____________
Did the cross-connection line disappear? Yes ____________ No _____________
If the cross-connection line disappeared, explain why that happened:
________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
If the cross-connection line did not disappear, explain why it is still there:
________________________________________________________________________
7 1 23
________________________________________________________________________
Exercises Labs
COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

List any new Alarms that have occurred as a result of removing the cross-connections.

Severity

Event Time

Entity

Probable Cause

Disable the Ethernet port you configured in Lab Exercise # 7.


Close the cross-connections screen and return to the NE Main View for the next Exercise.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-14 Edition 3.03
Section 7 Module 1 Page 23

Lab Exercise 16 - Remove Radio Cross-Connection


1. You must be logged into Microsoft Windows on your class computer.
2. You must have the NEtO application running.
3. You must have the DS1, DS3, and Ethernet ports configured in Lab Exercises 6, 7. and 8.
4. You must have made the Ethernet cross-connections in Lab Exercise 11.
Click on the cross-connections icon to open the cross-connections screen.
Remove the cross-connections as directed by the instructor.
What were the colors of the connectors before you made the cross-connection?
Ethernet ________________ Radio _____________
What are the colors of the connectors after you made the cross-connection?
Ethernet ________________ Radio _____________
Did the cross-connection line disappear? Yes ____________ No _____________
If the cross-connection line disappeared, explain why that happened:
________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
If the cross-connection line did not disappear, explain why it is still there:
________________________________________________________________________
7 1 24
________________________________________________________________________
Exercises Labs
COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

List any new Alarms that have occurred as a result of removing the cross-connections.

Severity

Event Time

Entity

Probable Cause

Disable the Ethernet port you configured in Lab Exercise # 7.


Close the cross-connections screen and return to the NE Main View for the next Exercise.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-14 Edition 3.03
Section 7 Module 1 Page 24

Lab Exercise 17 - Browser Interface


1.

Open a Web Browser. Type the IP Address of your assigned radio into the Address bar of the Web
Browser.

2.

When the Logon dialog box opens, use the following to log on:
Logon: ____________________________________________________________
Password: _________________________________________________________

3.

How many Active Alarms are displayed?


Alarm

Number

Critical
Major
Minor
Warning
Indeterminate
4.

Click on Refresh . Recheck the Active Alarms.

5.

9500 MPRon
(Microwave
Packet Radio)
Operations & Maintenance
R3.03 (ANSI)
Click
Enable
Automatic
Refresh.
Recheck the Active Alarms in 5 minutes.

6.

Click on > Date & Time Setting. Compare the Operating System Time with the GMT Time.

7.

Click on > License Info. Examine the RMU Serial Number and License String.

8.

Access the SW License information in the Browser View.

9.

Logout from the Browser interface.

7 1 25

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Exercises Labs

10. Return to the NE Main View for the next Exercise

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-14 Edition 3.03
Section 7 Module 1 Page 25

End of module
Labs

7 1 26
Exercises Labs
9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

COPYRIGHT ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TWT42013-14 Edition 3.03
Section 7 Module 1 Page 26

Last but one page

Congratulations
You have finished the training
Your feedback is appreciated!
Please feel free to Email your comments to:
training.feedback@alcatel-lucent.com
Please include the training reference in your email (see cover page)

Thank you!

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent @@YEAR

@@PRODUCT
@@COURSENAME

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent @@YEAR


@@COURSENAME - Page 1

All rights reserved Alcatel-Lucent


Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its
contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel-Lucent

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent @@YEAR


@@COURSENAME - Page 2

You might also like